First Alert 3040DF Home Security System User Manual

SL
Operator’s Manual
Symbols
Trademarks®:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP®
is a registered trademark of Daimler.
RHomeLink®
is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
The following symbols are found in this Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
X
This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X
A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure.
Y page
This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY
This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.
Our company and staff congratulate you on
the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an
automobile that will be as easy as possible to
operate and provide years of service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease
read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease
follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to
acquaint you with the operation of your
Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease
pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
Contents
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safety and security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Controls in detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
2
Index
A
ABC
see Active Body Control (ABC)
ABS (Antilock Brake System) . . . . . . . 64
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Accessory weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Accidents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Air bag deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 155
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) . . . . . . . 188
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
see Headlamps
Active Body Control (ABC) . . . . . . . . 157
Additives
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Address change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS) . . . . . . 220
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 291
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Emergency call upon deployment . 188
Front, driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Front, passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Head-thorax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Knee bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 52, 305
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Air conditioning refrigerant and
lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Air distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Air pressure
see Tire inflation pressure
Air pressure (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Air pump (electric) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . . 172
AIRSCARF neck-level heating . . . . . . . 94
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Alarm system
see Anti-theft systems
Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252, 321
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
AMG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . . 356
Antilock Brake System
see ABS
Anti-theft systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Anti-theft alarm system . . . . . . . . . . 71
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Aquaplaning
see Hydroplaning
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Aspect ratio (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Audio/DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 97
Automatic central locking . . . . . 81, 140
Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . . . 99
Automatic interior lighting control . 104
Automatic locking when driving . . . 140
Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . . 118
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . 115
Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . 118
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Gear range indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Gear ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Gearshifting malfunctions . . . . . . . 124
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . 157
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Kickdown (manual shift program) . 123
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 121
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . 120
Program mode indicator . . . . . . . . 119
3
Index
Program mode selector dial
(SL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 121
Program mode selector switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118, 119, 122
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Steering wheel gearshift control . . 120
Transmission position indicator . . . 116
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 116
AUX socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Axle oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
B
Backrest
see Seats
Backup lamps
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Bar (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . 64
Batteries, SmartKey
Checking condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Battery, Vehicle
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Bead (tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
4
Beverage holders
see Cup holders
Brake fluid
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake lamps
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pads
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High-performance brake system . .
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs
see Replacing bulbs
272
246
311
311
271
237
239
295
200
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) . . 22
California retail buyers and lessees, important notice for . . . . . . . . . 19
Calls (phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Can holders
see Cup holders
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Carpets, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Central locking
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81, 140
Locking/unlocking from inside . . . . 81
Central locking/unlocking switch . . . 81
Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Indicator lamp, passenger front
air bag off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Infant and child restraint systems . . 60
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Child safety
see Children in the vehicle
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Climate control system
Air conditioning, cooling . . . . . . . . 167
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . . 354
Air recirculation mode . . . . . . . . . . 172
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Air volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170, 171
Automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Deactivating system . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Front defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Maximum cooling MAX COOL . . . . 171
Residual engine heat (REST) . . . . . 172
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Index
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cold tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . 231
Collapsible tire (spare wheel) . . . . . 347
COMAND system
see separate COMAND system
operating instructions
Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 126
Resetting to factory settings . . . . . 135
Control system menus . . . . . . . . . . . 128
AMG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Audio/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Standard display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Vehicle status message memory . . 134
Control system submenus . . . . . . . . 128
Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Convenience submenu
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 140
Coolant
Anticorrosion/antifreeze . . . . . . . . 356
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 280, 282
Temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Last stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Customer Assistance Center
see CAC
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Daytime running lamp mode . . 100, 138
Deep water
see Standing water
Defogging (windshield) . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Defroster
Rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Delayed shut-off
Exterior lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Department of Transportation
see DOT
Difficulties
While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
With starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Dimensions (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Direction of rotation (tires) . . . . . . . 212
Displays
Digital speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Maintenance service indicator . . . . 242
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 141
Vehicle status message memory . . 134
Vehicle system settings . . . . . . . . . 135
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Cleaning system sensor . . . . . . . . . 246
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 155
Driving hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Last stored speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
5
Index
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Sensor cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Warning and indicator lamps . 149, 300
Door control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Doors
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . 76
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Locking/unlocking from outside . . . 76
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Opening from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . 192
Unlocking (Mechanical key) . . . . . . 307
DOT (Department of Transportation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Drinking and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Driving
Abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109, 236
In winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
RACE START (SL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . 156
Safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6
Through standing water . . . . . . . . . 240
With Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Driving and parking
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Driving off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 239
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
BAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Driving systems
Active Body Control (ABC) . . . . . . . 157
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Parktronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
RACE START (SL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . 156
Driving tips, automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
E
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . 95, 140
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Electrical system
Improper work on or modifications . 21
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP®
Emergency, in case of
Battery, jump starting . . . . . . . . . . 328
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . 102
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Emergency calls
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Emergency operations
Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Locking/unlocking the vehicle . . . 307
Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Trunk lid, emergency release . . . . . . 86
Trunk lid, unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Emergency Tensioning Device
see ETD
Emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
System warranties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Engine
Brake-in recommendations . . . . . . 200
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Malfunction indicator lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 302
Maximum engine speed . . . . . . . . . 341
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Index
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Turning off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Engine coolant
see Coolant
Engine oil
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Oil dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Recommended engine oils and oil
filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 65
ETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ETS (Electronic Traction System) . . . . 65
Express operation
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . 96
Exterior view of vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 26
F
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . 55
First aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Lowering the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Mounting the spare wheel . . . . . . . 318
Preparing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 347
Floormats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Fluids
ABC fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 351
Automatic transmission fluid . . . . . 350
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Hydraulic fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Front air bags
see Air bags
Front lamps
see Headlamps
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 236
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Capacities, fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Fuel consumption statistics . . . . . . 141
Fuel filler flap and cap . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 301
Premium unleaded gasoline
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 352, 354
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Fuel filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fuel tank
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Filler flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
G
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . 40, 193
Gasoline
see Fuel
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) . . 231
Gear range
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 118
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Shifting into optimal . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7
Index
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Gearshift pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110, 115
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Shifting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Transmission position indicator . . . 116
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . 116
Generator
see Alternator
Global locking/unlocking
see Key, SmartKey
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Gross Axle Weight Rating
see GAWR
Gross Vehicle Weight
see GVW
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
see GVWR
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) . . . . . . 231
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
H
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning . . 248
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . 103
8
Headlamps
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps . . . . . . . 98
Automatic headlamp mode . . . . . . . 99
Bi-Xenon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 311
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 101
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Headliner, cleaning and care of . . . . 249
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Head-thorax air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Height adjustment
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
High-beam flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . 101, 311
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . . 311
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
High-performance brake system . . . 239
Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
I
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Identification number, vehicle
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87, 89, 110
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Indicator lamps
see Lamps, indicator and warning
Infant and child restraint systems
see Children in the vehicle
Inflation pressure
see Tires, Inflation pressure
Inside door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 80
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 124
Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Instrument lighting
see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Instrument panel
see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls
see Cockpit
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Delayed shut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Reading lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Index
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 97
Interior storage spaces
see Storage compartments
Intermittent wiping
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
K
Key, Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Factory setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 79
Global locking (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . 77
Global locking (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Global unlocking (SmartKey) . . . . . . 77
Global unlocking (SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO . . . 78
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Loss of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Opening, Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Restoring to factory setting . . . . 77, 79
Selective setting . . . . . . . . . . . . 77, 79
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 87
Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 88
KEYLESS-GO
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . . . 88
Kickdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 123
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) . . . . . . 231
Knee bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
L
Labels
Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Emission control information . . . . . 340
Lamps, exterior
Exterior lamp switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 293
Battery (SmartKey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Distance warning lamp . 149, 155, 300
Engine malfunction . . . . . . . . . 33, 302
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 298
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Fuel tank reserve . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 301
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Passenger front air bag off
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 49, 305
Roll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 296
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45, 297
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Language, Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Light alloy wheels, cleaning . . . . . . . 248
Lighter
see Cigarette lighter
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Daytime running lamp mode . . . . . 100
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
9
Index
Limp-home mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Load assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Locator lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Lock button
Door handle (KEYLESS-GO) . . . . . . . 79
Locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 78
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Loss of
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Service and Warranty Information
booklet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
M
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Calling up service indicator . . . . . . 242
Clearing service indicator message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Resetting service indicator . . . . . . 243
Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Service indicator message . . . . . . . 242
Service term exceeded . . . . . . . . . 242
10
Manual headlamp mode (Lowbeam headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Maximum loaded vehicle weight . . . 231
Maximum load rating (tires) . . . . . . . 231
Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Media interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Menus
see Control system menus
Mirrors
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors . . . . 97
Exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . 96
Interior rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . 96
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
MOExtended system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
MOExtended tires . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 343
MON (Motor Octane Number) . 201, 354
Motor Octane Number
see MON
Multicontour seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Symbol messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vehicle status messages . . . . . . . . 255
Multifunction display messages
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Active headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Advanced TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 291
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . 265
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Check engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279, 280, 282
Corner-illuminating lamps . . . . . . . 289
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Display malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . 279
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Engine service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
ESP® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fog lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287, 288
Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Gear selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
High-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Light sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Low-beam lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Passenger front air bag . . . . . . . . . 258
Reserve fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Index
Retractable hardtop . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Reverse lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Roll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 274
Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
SmartKey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO . . . . . 277
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 291
Tire pressure monitor . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 291
TPMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 291
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Multifunction steering wheel
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . 95, 140
Gearshift control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
N
Navigation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Nets, parcel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Night security illumination . . . 101, 139
Normal occupant weight . . . . . . . . . 231
Number, vehicle identification
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
O
Occupant Classification System
see OCS
Occupant distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Children and air bags . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fastening the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . 55
Infant and child restraint systems . . 60
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50, 305
Roll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 53
OCS (Occupant Classification System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Oil
see Engine oil
Oil level
see Engine oil, Checking level
On-board computer
see Control system
One-touch gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ornamental moldings, cleaning . . . . 246
Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . . . . 40
P
Paintwork, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Paintwork code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Panic alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Panorama roof
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Parcel nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Parktronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Parking position
Transmission position . . . . . . . . . . 116
Parktronic
Cleaning system sensors . . . . . . . . 247
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Minimum distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
System sensors . . . . . . . . . . . 160, 247
Warning indicators . . . . . . . . . . 29, 161
Parts service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
see Passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
11
Index
Passenger front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 49, 305
Passenger safety
see Occupant safety
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Phone
see Telephone
Plastic parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Power assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Power closing assist for trunk lid . . . 87
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Power seats
see Seats
Power washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Door windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Rear side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Synchronizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Practical hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Problems
While driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
With vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Production options weight . . . . . . . . 232
12
Program mode selector dial (SL 63 AMG)
Automatic shift program . . . . . . . . 119
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Program mode selector switch
Automatic shift program . . . . 118, 119
Manual shift program . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Proximity key
see Key, SmartKey
PSI (air pressure unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Push-start
see Tow-start
R
RACE START (SL 63 AMG) . . . . . . . . . 156
RACETIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Radio
Selecting stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Radio transmitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Rear axle oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Rear fog lamp
see Fog lamps
Rear lamps
see Tail lamps
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Recommended tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215, 232
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Refrigerant, air conditioning . . . . . . 354
Refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Regular checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Reminder, Seat belt
see Seat belts, Telltale
Remote control
see Key, SmartKey
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) . . . . . 192
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Brake lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
High-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 311
High-mounted brake lamp . . . . . . . 311
License plate lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Low-beam headlamps . . . . . . . . . . 311
Parking lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Standing lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Turn signal lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . 22
Research Octane Number
see RON
Reserve fuel
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 301
Reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 124, 135
Restraint systems
see Occupant safety
Index
Retractable hardtop . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Wind screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232, 343
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 20, 190
Roll bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
RON (Research Octane Number)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 354
Roof
see Retractable hardtop
Route guidance
see Navigation system
Rubber parts, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Run-flat tires
see MOExtended tires
S
Safety
Driving safety systems . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Reporting defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Safety belts
see Seat belts
Seat belt force limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Automatic comfort-fit feature . . . . . 57
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Proper use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Safety guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 296
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Easy-entry/exit feature . . . . . . . . . . 95
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Multicontour seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Selective setting
see Key, SmartKey
Selector lever
see Gear selector lever
Self-test
OCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Service
see Maintenance
Service, parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Service and warranty information . . . 19
Service intervals
see Maintenance System, Service
indicator
Service life (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Settings
Control system menus and submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Factory setting (SmartKey) . . . . 77, 79
Individual (vehicle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Selective setting (SmartKey) . . . 77, 79
Side marker lamps
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Sidewall (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Side windows
see Power windows
13
Index
SmartKey
see Key, SmartKey
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
see Key, SmartKey
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Snow tires
see Winter tires
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253, 343
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Speed settings
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Resume function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
SRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 297
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Standing water, driving through . . . 240
Starter switch positions . . . . . . . . 87, 88
Starting difficulties (engine) . . . . . . 110
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Steering column
see Multifunction steering wheel,
Adjusting
Steering wheel
see Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel gearshift control . . . 120
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . . 193
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . 34, 181
Storing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
14
Submenus
see Control system submenus
Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overspeed range . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tail lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tar stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant . . . . . .
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil additives . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identification labels . . . . . . . . . . . .
Premium unleaded gasoline . . . . . .
Rims and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
125
311
246
289
311
245
354
354
350
355
349
348
341
353
353
354
355
339
354
343
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Information button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Initiating an emergency call manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Remote door unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Roadside Assistance button . . . . . 190
SOS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services . 193
System self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Answering/ending a call . . . . . . . . 143
Hands-free microphone . . . . . . . . . . 40
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Phone book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Temperature
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Interior temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Tightening torque
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Index
TIN (Tire Identification Number) . . . 232
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Tire and loading terminology . . . . . . 230
Tire Identification Number
see TIN
Tire inflation pressure
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Important notes on . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar . . . 212
Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Tire load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tire ply composition and material
used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 291
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 343
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS) . . . . 220
Advanced TPMS low tire pressure
telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Care and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 210
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Direction of rotation, spinning . . . . 212
Important notes on tire inflation
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . 216, 217
Information placard . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Load rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266, 291
MOExtended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Ply composition and material used 232
Problems under-/overinflation . . . . 216
Retreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Rims and tires (technical data) . . . 343
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 232
Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216, 230
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Tire Identification Number . . . . . . . 232
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
TPMS low tire pressure/malfunction telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 303
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 232
Tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211, 234
Treadwear indicators . . . . . . . 211, 232
Vehicle maximum load on . . . . . . . 233
Wear pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 343
Tire speed rating . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 232
Top tether
Children in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Total load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tow-away alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Towing eye bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Tow-start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328, 330
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 207
Transmission gear selector lever
see Gear selector lever
Transmission positions . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Traveling abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tread (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tread depth (tires) . . . . . . . . . . 211, 234
Treadwear indicators (tires) . . . 211, 232
Trip computer menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Trip odometer, resetting . . . . . . . . . . 125
Trunk
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Load assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
15
Index
Opening/closing system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83, 85
Trunk lid emergency release . . . . . . 86
Unlocking in an emergency . . . . . . 307
Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Turning off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Additional in mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Cleaning lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Indicator lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229, 233
Units, Settings
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Unleaded gasoline, premium . . . . . . 354
Unlocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 76, 78
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Upholstery, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Useful features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
16
V
Valet locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Vehicle
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Individual settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Locking/unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . 76, 78
Locking/unlocking manually . . . . . 307
Lowering (wheel change) . . . . . . . . 324
Modifications and alterations,
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Vehicle jack
see Jack
Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Vehicle loading
Load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Vehicle maximum load on the tire . . 233
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
(Tele Aid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Vehicle status message memory . . . 134
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Vehicle washing
see Vehicle care
W
Warning lamps
see Lamps, Indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function . . . . . . . 155
Distronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt . . . 56
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Parktronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Seat belt telltale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Warranty coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Washer fluid
Messages in the multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Mixing ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Refilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Wiping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Wear pattern (tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Wheel
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Wheels, sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Wheels, Tires and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Windows
see Power windows
Index
Windows, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Wind screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . 247
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106, 357
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Windshield wipers
Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . 316
Winter driving
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Winter driving instructions . . . . . . . 235
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234, 343
Wood trims, cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
17
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Product Information
Please observe the following in your own best
interest:
We recommend using Genuine MercedesBenz Parts as well as conversion parts and
accessories explicitly approved by us for your
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be held
responsible for them, even if in individual
cases an official approval or authorization by
governmental or other agencies should exist.
Use of such parts and accessories could
adversely affect the safety, performance or
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use
them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and preapproved conversion parts and accessories
are available at any authorized MercedesBenz Center. In addition, you will receive comprehensive information on permissible technical modifications and expert installations.
18
Operator’s Manual
Notes
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the
vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life of
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could result in
damage to the vehicle or personal injury to
you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we
reserve the right to make changes in design
and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s
Manual might differ from your vehicle.
Vehicle equipment
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. Therefore, you may find explanations for optional
equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you
have any questions about operating any
equipment, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper
procedures.
Optional equipment is also described in this
manual, including operating instructions
wherever necessary. Since they are specialorder items, the descriptions and illustrations
herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.
If there are any equipment details that are not
shown or described in this Operator’s Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
will be glad to inform you of correct care and
operating procedures. The Operator’s Manual
and Maintenance Booklet are important
documents and should be kept with the vehicle.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Service and warranty information
The Service and Warranty Information booklet contains detailed information about the
warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
including:
RNew
Car Limited Warranty
REmission
System Warranty
REmission
Performance Warranty
RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island, and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty
RState
Laws)
Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reasonable number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized
repair or service facilities fail to fix one or
more substantial defects or malfunctions in
the vehicle that are covered by its express
warranty. During the period of 18 months
from original delivery of the vehicle or the
accumulation of 18 000 miles (approximately
29 000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle,
whichever occurs first, a reasonable number
of repair attempts is presumed for a retail
buyer or lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the
vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or
more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in writing
of the need for its repair,
gory (1) has been subject to repair four
or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair,
or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Written notification should not be sent to a
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
necessary maintenance work which should
be performed at regular intervals.
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
you when you take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The
service advisor will record each service in the
booklet for you.
Z
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than cate-
19
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year.
For additional information refer to the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (in the USA) or the Roadside Assistance section of the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet (in Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
20
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to send
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in
the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. This will
assist us in contacting you in a timely manner
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available
to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service
(in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
Rservice
facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available,
Runleaded
gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the
use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts,
Rgasoline
may have a considerably lower
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
engine damage.
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available
for delivery in Europe under our European
Delivery Program. For details, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:
In the USA:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety
G Warning!
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software
could cause them to cease functioning.
Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may produce an undesired
effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Other improper work or modifications on
the vehicle could also have a negative
impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while
the engine is running. You should therefore
never turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning!
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel
a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to
your vehicle has occurred, you should turn
on your hazard warning flashers, carefully
slow down, and drive with caution to an
area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
other qualified maintenance or repair
facility for further inspection or repairs.
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed
to do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/
or personal injury.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
familiar with the following information and
rules:
Rthe
safety precautions in this manual
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
Rtraffic
rules and regulations
Rmotor
vehicle laws and safety standards
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
Z
21
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected if required. If the matter is not
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
management or, if necessary, contact us at
one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
22
Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices
mation that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to
continuously improve vehicle safety. Daimler
may access the information and share it with
others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis pur-
poses
Rwith
the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin
response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor
use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras
otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the infor-
Z
23
24
At a glance
Exterior view .......................................
Cockpit .................................................
Instrument cluster ..............................
Storage compartments .......................
Multifunction steering wheel .............
Center console ....................................
Overhead control panel ......................
Door control panel ..............................
26
28
30
34
36
38
40
41
25
At a glance
Exterior view
Exterior view
26
At a glance
Exterior view
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please
be aware that your vehicle might not be equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function
1
Page
Trunk
Locking and unlocking
76
Opening and closing
82,
83
Valet locking
86
Vehicle tool kit
252
2
Rear window defroster
173
3
Fuel filler flap
201
Fuel requirements
354
4
6
Retractable hardtop
7
Windshield
Locking and unlocking
76
Opening
80
Exterior rear view mirrors
308
Page
173
d
Function
Page
Tires and wheels
209,
343
Cleaning with wiper fluid
106
Checking tire inflation pressure
217
Cleaning
247
Spare wheel
346
Wipers
105
Flat tire
317
Wiper blades, replacing
316
e
Rear lamps
311
Wiper blades, cleaning
247
f
Rear towing eye
331
Hood
203
Engine oil
204
Coolant
207
a
Front lamps
311
b
Headlamp cleaning system
103
c
Front towing eye
331
8
9
Doors
Locking and unlocking
manually
5
Function
96
Z
27
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit
28
At a glance
Cockpit
Function
1
2
3
Exterior lamp switch
Headlamp cleaning button
Page
99
Function
b
103
Cruise control lever
Interior storage compartments (locking/unlocking)
c
Overhead control panel
d
Glove box
Page
182
40
145
• Distronic
150
e
Center console
38
4
Left gearshift control
120
f
Starter switch
87
5
Instrument cluster
30,
124
g
Horn
h
6
Multifunction steering
wheel
36,
126
Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
7
Right gearshift control
120
8
Lever for Voice Control System, see separate operating instructions
9
a
Front Parktronic warning
indicators
Digital clock
161
Page
m
Hood lock release lever
203
n
Parking brake release
113
o
Door control panel
41
169,
181
• Cruise control
j
Function
95
Combination switch
• Turn signals
102
• Wipers
105
• High beam
101
k
Parking brake pedal
113
l
On-board diagnostics
(OBD) socket
Z
29
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
30
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function
1
2
Page
Coolant temperature gauge
125
D Coolant temperature
warning lamp
303
Function
3
Speedometer with:
L Left turn signal indicator lamp
v ABS/ESP® warning
lamp
296
E Distronic indicator
lamp (white) or distance
warning lamp (red)1
149,
150
; Brake warning lamp,
USA only
3 Brake warning lamp,
Canada only
4
Page
Left multifunction display with:
Outside temperature indicator or digital speedometer (depending on selected
setting in the control system)
129,
136
Main odometer
127
Set speed for cruise control
or Distronic
144,
150
Reset button for:
Resetting trip odometer
125
295
Resetting individual settings
135
295
Adjusting instrument cluster illumination
125
K Right turn signal indicator lamp
Z
1
Vehicles without Distronic: Warning/indicator lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is switched on. It should go out when the engine is running.
31
At a glance
Instrument cluster
32
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function
5
Page
Function
Tachometer with:
A High-beam headlamp
indicator lamp
< Seat belt telltale
¯ ESP OFF warning
lamp, SL 63 AMG only
101
6
56,
296
C Roll bar warning lamp
300
- Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp
64,
293
1 Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS)
indicator lamp
45,
297
ú Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, USA only
302
± Engine malfunction
indicator lamp, Canada only
302
H Combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale, USA only
218,
303
H Low tire pressure telltale, Canada only
220,
303
7
Page
67,
299
Right multifunction display with:
Trip odometer
125
Transmission position indicator
116
Gear range indicator
118
Transmission program
mode indicator
118
Fuel gauge with:
4 Fuel tank reserve
warning lamp (the arrow
indicates that the fuel filler
flap is on the right-hand
side)
301
Z
33
At a glance
Storage compartments
Storage compartments
34
At a glance
Storage compartments
Function
Page
1
Glove box
181
2
Passenger seat storage
compartment
182
First aid kit
252
3
Door storage compartment
182
4
Rear storage compartment,
passenger side
182
Side storage compartment
in trunk, parcel net
180
5
6
a
b
c
Page
Parcel net in passenger
footwell
180
Storage/telephone compartment
181
Luggage straps
183
Trunk
Load assist
184
Luggage cover
178
Rear storage compartment,
driver’s side
182
8
Door storage compartment
182
9
Driver’s seat storage compartment
182
7
Function
Z
35
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
Page
1
Left multifunction display
127
Press button æ or ç
2
Right multifunction display
127
3
Press button s
• to select submenus in
the Settings menu
142
• to dial2
142
• to operate the RACETIMER3
• to
142
• to set the volume
redial2
3
Function only available in telephone menu.
AMG vehicles only.
36
4
• to end a call
142
• to reject an incoming
call
142
Page
136
• to set values
• to take a call
Press button t
2
Function
Press button è or ·
to select next/previous
menu
130
126
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function
Page
Function
Page
Press button j or k
briefly
Press and hold button
j or k
• to move within a menu
• to select previous or
next track with quick
search or to select previous or next station in
station list or wave
band within Audio/
DVD menu
132
• to start the quick
search in the phone
book within Telephone
menu
142
• to select previous or
next track, scene or
stored station within
Audio/DVD menu
• to switch to the phone
book and select a name
or number within Telephone menu
132
142
Z
37
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part
Function
Central locking switch
81
Alarm system indicator
lamp
71
Hazard warning flasher
switch
102
3
Central locking switch
81
4
Passenger front air bag off
indicator lamp
50
1
2
5
Center and side air vent
adjustment
6
COMAND system, see separate operating instructions
7
Cup holder
8
KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button
9
a
38
Page
Function
b
168
185
88
Automatic climate control
panel
164
Ashtray
186
Page
Cigarette lighter
186
Cup holder
185
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Function
Page
Function
Page
1
Gear selector lever
115
a
2
Parktronic system deactivation switch
Distance warning function
switch4
147,
155
162
b
Program mode selector
switch4
118
3
Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
96
ABC suspension tuning button
159
5
Tow-away alarm off switch
73
6
Retractable hardtop switch
173
4
Roll bar buttons
7
8
9
59
ABC vehicle level control
button
158
Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) switch4
65
Thumbwheel for setting following distance for Distronic4
147,
153
Z
4
Layout in SL 63 AMG differs.
39
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Function
1
Left reading lamp switch
2
Temperature sensor for
automatic climate control
3
Right reading lamp switch
104
4
Automatic interior lighting
control
104
104
5
Interior rear view mirror
96
6
Reading lamp
96
7
Garage door opener
193
8
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) button
189
Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid (emergency call
system) and telephone
187
9
40
Page
At a glance
Door control panel
Door control panel
Function
Page
1
Inside door handle
80
2
Power window switch
3
Memory function
97
Memory position buttons
97
Memory button
97
4
AIRSCARF switch
94
5
Seat heating switch
93
Seat ventilation switch
92
6
Seat adjustment switch
90
7
Remote trunk opening
switch
82
Remote trunk opening/
closing switch
82,
83
107
Z
41
42
Safety and security
Vehicle equipment ..............................
Occupant safety ..................................
Panic alarm ..........................................
Driving safety systems .......................
Anti-theft systems ..............................
44
44
62
63
71
43
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle
might not be equipped with all features
described in this manual.
Occupant safety
Introduction
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
RSeat
RChild
belts
restraints
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with
-
Air bags
-
Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)
-
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
seat belts
-
Seat belt force limiter
RRoll
bar
RAir
-
bag system components with
Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
Passenger seat with Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
44
G Warning!
Modifications to or work improperly conducted on restraint system components or
their wiring, as well as tampering with interconnected electronic systems, can lead to
the restraint systems no longer functioning
as intended.
Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although
the deceleration threshold for air bag
deployment is exceeded. Therefore, never
modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their
software.
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and
restraint systems for infants and children,
see “Children in the vehicle” (Y page 60).
Safety and security
Occupant safety
SRS indicator lamp
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when the ignition is
switched on and goes out no later than a few
seconds after the engine has been started.
The SRS components are in operational readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not lit when
the engine is running.
A malfunction in the system has been
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
Rfails to go out after approximately 4 seconds after the engine is started
Rdoes
not come on at all
Rcomes
on after the engine was started or
while driving
G Warning!
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on while driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected
a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to
have the system checked; otherwise the
SRS may not deploy when needed in an
accident, which could result in serious or
fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly
and unnecessarily which could also result
in injury.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative
or causing unintended air bag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system
to accommodate a person with disabilities,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
Air bags
G Warning!
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury and fatality in certain frontal
impacts (front air bags, driver side knee
bags) or side impacts (head-thorax air
bags). However, no system available today
can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily
releases a small amount of dust from the
air bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a
fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause
some temporary breathing difficulty for
people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, you may wish to get out
of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.
G Warning!
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
air bags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and passenger to always be in a propZ
45
Safety and security
Occupant safety
erly seated position and to wear their seat
belts.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the seat backrest. Fasten your seat belt and make sure
it is properly positioned on your body.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating position
and correct positioning of the hands on the
steering wheel will help to keep you at a
safe distance from the air bag. Occupants
who are not wearing their seat belt, are not
seated properly or are too close to the air
bag can be seriously injured or killed by an
air bag as it inflates with great force instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in
a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the seat backrest.
RMove
the driver seat as far back as possible, still permitting proper operation of
vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver’s chest to the center
of the air bag cover on the steering wheel
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or
more. You should be able to accomplish
this by adjusting the seat and steering
46
wheel. If you have any difficulties, please
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RDo
not lean your head or chest close to
the steering wheel or dashboard.
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when the
driver’s front air bag inflates.
RAdjust
the passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied.
ROccupants,
especially children, should
never place their bodies or lean their
heads in the area of the door where the
head-thorax air bag inflates. This could
result in serious injuries or death should
the head-thorax air bag be deployed.
Always sit as upright as possible, wear
the seat belt properly and use an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended
for the size and weight of the child.
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injuries to you or other
occupants.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
you make the buyer aware of this safety
information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Operator’s Manual.
G Warning!
There is a possibility of a head-thorax air
bag related injury if occupants, especially
children, are not properly seated or
restrained when next to a head-thorax air
bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side
impact in order to do its job.
To help avoid the possibility of injury,
please follow these guidelines:
(1)
Occupants, especially children,
should never place their bodies
or lean their heads in the area of
the door where the head-thorax
air bag inflates. This could result
in serious injuries or death
should the head-thorax air bag
be deployed.
(2)
Always sit as upright as possible,
properly use the seat belts, and
for children 12 years old and
under, use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recom-
Safety and security
Occupant safety
mended for the size and weight
of the child.
(3)
Always wear seat belts properly.
If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
passenger seat occupants to have the passenger side head-thorax air bag deactivated, then deactivation can be carried out
upon your written request at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional
cost.
Please contact an local authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call the Customer
Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100 for details.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
frontal impacts (front air bags, driver side
knee bag) and in side impacts (head-thorax
air bags) which exceed preset deployment
thresholds. Only in the event of such a situation will they provide their supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible
for the air bags to provide their supplemental
protection.
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
bags will not deploy. The driver and passenger
will then be protected to the extent possible
by a properly fastened seat belt. A properly
fastened seat belt is also needed to provide
the best possible protection in a rollover.
Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
air bags.
It is important to your safety and that of your
passenger that you replace deployed air bags
and repair any malfunctioning air bags to
make sure the vehicle will continue to provide
supplemental crash protection for occupants.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
and air bag
G Warning!
RDamaged
seat belts or seat belts that
have been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only
use seat belts installed or supplied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir
bags and ETDs contain Perchlorate
material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment.
Check with your local government’s disposal guidelines. California residents,
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Perchlorate/index.cfm.
RAir
bags and ETDs are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. An air bag
or ETD that is deployed must be replaced.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
RDo not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the seat
belts.
RDo
not bleach or dye seat belts as this
may severely weaken them. In a crash
they may not be able to provide adequate
protection.
RNo
modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of the
SRS. This includes changing or removing
any component or part of the SRS, the
installation of additional trim material,
seat covers, badges, etc. over the steer-
47
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
ing wheel hub, passenger front air bag
cover, outboard sides of the seat
backrests, door trim panels, or door
frame trims, and installation of additional
electrical/electronic equipment on or
near SRS components and wiring. Keep
area between air bags and occupant free
of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
umbrellas, etc.).
RAir
bag system components will be hot
after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch
them.
RNever
place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RGiven
the considerable deployment
speed, required inflation volume, and the
material of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other, potentially
more serious injuries resulting from air
bag deployment.
Front air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 47.
If you sell your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you inform the subsequent owner
that the vehicle is equipped with SRS and
refer them to the applicable section in the
Operator’s Manual.
1 Driver air bag
2 Passenger air bag
RIn
3 Knee bag
RFor your protection and the protection of
The front air bags are designed to provide
increased protection for the driver and passenger against the risk of injuries to the head
and thorax.
Driver and passenger air bags and driver’s
side knee bag are deployed:
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
inoperative or causing unintended air bag
deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit
or ETD, our safety instructions must be
followed. These instructions are available
48
Rif
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Rif
the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rdepending
on whether the seat belt is in
use
Rindependently
of the head-thorax air bags
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows
the air bags to have different rates of inflation
that are based on the vehicle deceleration
rate as assessed by the air bag control unit.
On the passenger side, the front air bag
deployment is additionally influenced by the
passenger’s weight category as identified by
the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
(Y page 50).
The lighter the passenger side occupant, the
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required
for second stage inflation of the air bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset deployment thresholds. You will then be protected
by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deployed in the
event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The passenger air bag 2 will only be
deployed if:
Rthe
system, based on OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the passenger seat
is occupied
Head-thorax air bags
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 47.
Rthe
5/ indicator lamp in the center
console is not lit (Y page 52)
Rthe
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Knee bag
The knee bag 3 is located on the driver side
lower instrument panel. It is designed to operate together with the driver front air bag in
certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset
deployment threshold. The knee bag 3 operates best in conjunction with a properly positioned and fastened seat belt.
1 Head-thorax air bag
When deployed, the head-thorax air bags are
designed to provide increased protection for
the head and thorax (but not for the arms) on
the side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.
The head-thorax air bags are deployed:
Ron
the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin
side impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold
Rif
the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
49
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Rindependently
of the front air bags
leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
able to properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
Rindependently
of the ETDs
i If your seat, including the trim cover and
Rdepending
on whether the seat belt is in
use
The passenger head-thorax air bag 1 will
only deploy if the OCS senses that the passenger seat is occupied and the impact
exceeds a preset deployment threshold.
The head-thorax air bags are not deployed in
side impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
Occupant Classification System
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
automatically turns the passenger front air
bag on or off based on the classified occupant
weight category determined by weight sensor
readings from the passenger seat.
The system does not deactivate the passenger head-thorax air bag and the Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs).
Occupants must sit with the seat belt properly fastened in a position that is as upright
as possible with their back against the seat
backrest and feet on the floor to be correctly
classified. If the occupant’s weight is transferred to another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
50
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way,
take the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only seat accessories approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
Both the driver and the passenger should
always use the 5/ indicator lamp as
an indication of whether or not the passenger
is properly positioned.
G Warning!
If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates
when an adult or someone larger than a
small individual is in the passenger seat,
have the passenger re-position himself or
herself in the seat until the 5/ indicator lamp goes out.
In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow passenger front air bag
deployment when the OCS has classified
the passenger seat occupant as weighting
as much as or less than a typical 12-monthold child in a standard child restraint or if
the passenger seat is classified as being
empty.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as being up to
or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint, the 5/ indicator lamp will
illuminate when the engine is started and
remain illuminated, indicating that the passenger front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat is classified as being empty, the
5/ indicator lamp will illuminate
when the engine is started and remain illuminated, indicating that the passenger
front air bag is deactivated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as being heavier
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
child seated in a standard child restraint or
as being a small individual (such as a young
teenager or a small adult), the 5/
indicator lamp will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
started and then, depending on occupant
weight sensor readings from the seat,
remain illuminated or go out. With the
5/ indicator lamp illuminated, the
Safety and security
Occupant safety
passenger front air bag is deactivated. With
the 5/ indicator lamp out, the passenger front air bag is activated.
When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as an adult or
someone larger than a small individual, the
5/ indicator lamp will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds when the engine
is started and then go out, indicating that
the passenger front air bag is activated.
If the 5/ indicator lamp is illuminated, the passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.
If the 5/ indicator lamp is not illuminated, the passenger front air bag is activated and will be deployed:
Rin
the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif
impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
Rindependently of the head-thorax air bag
If the passenger front air bag is deployed,
the rate of inflation will be influenced by:
Rthe
rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
as assessed by the air bag control unit
Rthe passenger’s weight category as iden-
For information about air bag display messages (Y page 258).
G Warning!
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt
fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should
always sit as upright as possible, wear the
seat belt properly and use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information:
RYour
vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the passenger seat.
RA
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle.
RIf
you install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat, make sure the
5/ indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicating that the passenger front air
bag is deactivated. Should the
5/ indicator lamp not illuminate
or go out while the restraint is installed,
please check installation. Periodically
check the 5/ indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the
5/ indicator lamp is illuminated.
If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously
tified by the OCS.
Z
51
Safety and security
Occupant safety
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf
you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of
the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the passenger front
air bag may or may not be activated.
Deployment of the driver front air bag does
not mean that the passenger front air bag also
should have deployed.
The OCS may have determined:
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical
12-month-old child seated in a standard
child restraint – both instances where the
system suppresses deployment of the passenger front air bag even though the impact
met the criteria and was of sufficient
severity to deploy the driver front air bag
Rthat
the seat was occupied by a small individual (such as a young teenager or a small
adult) or a child who weighs more than the
52
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint – both of which are
instances where the system may suppress
deployment of the passenger front air bag
even though the impact met the criteria and
was of sufficient severity to deploy the
driver front air bag
passenger front air bag will be deactivated
in this case. Have the system checked as
soon as possible by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
In order to ensure proper operation of the
air bag system and OCS
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in
a position that is as upright as possible
with your back against the seat backrest.
RWhile
1 Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp
The 5/ indicator lamp 1 will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch or with the starter
switch in position 0.
G Warning!
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
5/ indicator lamp are lit at the same
time, there is a malfunction in the OCS. The
seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
from the seat bottom as this may result
in the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weight category.
RRead
and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Occupant Classification System Selftest
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or twice, the
Safety and security
Occupant safety
5/ indicator lamp illuminates. If an
adult occupant is properly sitting on the passenger seat and the system classifies the
occupant as an adult, the 5/ indicator
lamp will illuminate and go out after approximately 6 seconds.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
classifies the passenger seat as being empty,
the 5/ indicator lamp will illuminate
and not go out.
G Warning!
If the 5/ indicator lamp does not
illuminate, the system is not functioning.
You must contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center before seating any child on the
passenger seat.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (Y page 305).
G Warning!
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom
of the child seat must make full contact
with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident,
instead of increasing protection for the
child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
Seat belts
Safety notes
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all 50
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle” (Y page 60).
G Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passenger is
properly restrained. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. The air bags can
only protect as intended if the occupants
are properly wearing their seat belts.
G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in a position that is as
upright as possible and the seat belt is
properly positioned on the body.
Z
53
Safety and security
Occupant safety
G Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
G Warning!
Keep the door storage compartments
closed while vehicle is in motion. Failure to
do so may cause the seat belt to catch at
the rear and prevent proper positioning of
the seat belt.
G Warning!
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points must
also be checked.
Only use seat belts which have been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to their failure to activate
when necessary.
54
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Proper use of seat belts
G Warning!
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RSeat belts can only work when used prop-
erly. Never wear seat belts in any other
way than as described in this section, as
that could result in serious injuries in
case of an accident.
REach
occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including
rollovers. The integrated restraint system
includes SRS (driver front air bag, driver
side knee bag, passenger front air bag,
head-thorax air bags), Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) and seat belt force
limiters. The system is designed to
enhance the protection offered to prop-
erly belted occupants in certain frontal
(front air bags, driver side knee bag and
ETD) and side (head-thorax air bags and
ETD) impacts which exceed preset
deployment thresholds.
RNever
wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your
shoulder. In a frontal crash, your body
would move too far forward. That would
increase the chance of head and neck
injuries. The seat belt would also apply
too much force to the ribs or abdomen,
which could severely injure internal
organs such as your liver or spleen.
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder (it should not
touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder
portion of the seat belt under your arm.
RPosition
the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the lap belt is positioned across
your abdomen, it could cause serious
injuries in a crash.
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or break-
able objects in or on your clothing, such
as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as these
might cause injuries.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
RMake
sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing.
RNever
use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
around a person and another person or
other objects at the same time.
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In
a crash, you would not have the full width
of the seat belt to distribute impact
forces. The twisted seat belt against your
body could cause injuries.
RPregnant
women should also always use
a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that
is as upright as possible.
RCheck
your seat belt during travel to
make sure it is properly positioned.
RNever
place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen
using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children
in booster seats, always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the seat belts.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Fastening the seat belts
G Warning!
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers is
properly restrained. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
position your seat belt greatly increases
your risk of injuries and their likely severity
in an accident.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury
or death is lessened if you are properly
wearing your seat belt. The air bags can
only protect as intended if the occupants
are properly wearing their seat belts.
G Warning!
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
55
Z
Safety and security
Occupant safety
the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see section “Children in
the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
X
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
X
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Make
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
Press the seat belt release button
(Y page 56).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding the latch plate.
! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so
G Warning!
56
Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until it
clicks.
Releasing the seat belts
G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in a position that is as
upright as possible and the seat belt is
properly positioned on the body.
X
1 Seat belt outlet
2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Seat belt release button
X
With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
of seat belt housing 1.
X
Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
across the top of your shoulder and the lap
portion across your hips.
that the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot
get caught or pinched in the door or in the
seat mechanism. This can damage the seat
belt and impair its effectiveness, and/or
cause damage to the door and/or door trim
panel. Such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt telltale < will always illuminate for 6 seconds
Safety and security
Occupant safety
to remind you and your passenger to fasten
your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
the engine is started, an additional warning
chime will also sound for a maximum of 6 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is fastened.
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
passenger’s seat belt (with the passenger
seat occupied) is not fastened with both
doors closed,
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale
< is flashing again if the vehicle speed
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
Rthe
The seat belt telltale < will only go out if
both the driver’s and the passenger’s seat
belt (with the passenger seat occupied) are
fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
door is opened.
For more information, see “Practical
hints” (Y page 296).
Rand
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
seat belt telltale < remains illuminated for as long as either the driver’s or
passenger’s seat belt is not fastened.
if the vehicle speed once exceeds
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
< starts flashing and a warning chime
sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver’s and
passenger’s seat belt are fastened.
If you and/or your passenger release the
seat belt during driving, the seat belt telltale < starts flashing and the warning
chime sounds as described before.
If the driver’s or the passenger’s seat belt
remains unfastened after 60 seconds, the
warning chime stops sounding, the seat
belt telltale < stops flashing but continues to be illuminated.
The seat belts are equipped with ETDs and
seat belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:
Rin
frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
the system’s preset deployment threshold
The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts are
fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
buckle).
In an impact, ETDs remove slack from the
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
limiters, when activated, are employed to
help reduce the peak force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash.
i ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
ETDs do not pull occupants back toward
the backrest.
G Warning!
An ETD that was activated must be
replaced.
For your safety, when disposing of the ETD
allways follow our safety instructions.
These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rif the restraint systems are operational and
functioning correctly, see 1 indicator
lamp (Y page 45)
Rin
certain vehicle rollovers if the system
determines an additional degree of protection
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
The automatic comfort-fit feature reduces the
retracting force of the seat belts when they
are in normal use.
Z
57
Safety and security
Occupant safety
Correct driver seat adjustment
3 Seat
G Warning!
X
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control all seat, head restraint, steering
wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
well as fastening of seat belts, must be
done before the vehicle is put into motion.
Properly position seat 3 (Y page 90) and
head restraint (Y page 90).
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 89.
Observe the following points:
RAlways
be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in steering wheel 1 as
possible, while still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls.
RAdjust
seat 3 to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
3 must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten and position your
seat belt 2.
ter of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level.
RNever
place hands under seat 3 or near
any moving parts while seat 3 is being
adjusted.
X
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 95.
Make sure:
RYou
can reach steering wheel 1 with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
RYou
is as nearly upright as possible.
RAdjust
the seat cushion so that the front
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
your legs.
RAdjust
1 Steering wheel
2 Seat belt
58
the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the cen-
can move your legs freely.
RAll displays (including malfunction and indi-
cator lamps) on the instrument cluster are
clearly visible.
RSeat
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
Properly position steering wheel 1
(Y page 95).
X
Correctly fasten and position your
seat belt 2 (Y page 55).
Safety and security
Occupant safety
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 53.
Make sure:
RSeat
belt 2 is always fitted snugly.
RAdjust
seat belt 2 so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to
the middle of the shoulder.
RPlace
the lap portion of seat belt 2 as low
as possible on your hips.
Roll bar
! If the outside temperature falls below
+5‡ (-15†), the roll bar must be raised
manually using the buttons provided to
avoid damaging the hydraulics.
The roll bar raises automatically in an accident or in a critical driving situation.
i When the roll bar is raised automatically,
you will hear a ratcheting sound.
You can also raise and lower the roll bar manually using the buttons provided.
The buttons for the roll bar are on the center
console under the retractable hardtop switch.
G Warning!
This vehicle is a two occupant vehicle. The
rear storage area is not equipped to properly seat or restrain occupants and therefore is not permitted for use by any
persons.
Make sure that the roll bar’s path of motion
is clear and no persons are injured by the
moving roll bar. Raising or lowering of the
roll bar could injure someone in it’s proximity.
For your own safety, we recommend to
drive with the roll bar raised if the outside
temperature is below +5‡ (-15†).
1 Raise roll bar
2 Lower roll bar
The roll bar can be moved manually when the
ignition is switched on.
G Warning!
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in
the instrument cluster does not go out after
starting the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, the roll bar system is not operating
properly and may not activate in an accident. At the same time, the message Raise
Roll-over Bar appears in the multifunction display. In this case, raise the roll bar
manually before continuing to drive.
For safety reasons, drive only with the roll
bar raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Raising: Lift the switch for the retractable
hardtop.
X
Press and hold button 1 until the roll bar
is raised.
X
Lowering: Lift the switch for the retractable hardtop.
If the roll bar was raised manually:
X Press and hold button 2 until the roll bar
is lowered.
If the roll bar was raised automatically:
Z
59
Safety and security
Occupant safety
X
X
Press and hold button 1 until you hear the
roll bar lock into place.
Press and hold button 2 until the roll bar
is lowered.
i If you have raised the roll bar manually
using the button, the roll bar will automatically be lowered and then raised again
when you close and open the retractable
hardtop.
Children in the vehicle
Safety notes
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
vehicle:
X Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
the child.
X
Make sure the infant or child is properly
secured at all times while the vehicle is in
motion.
60
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Always take the SmartKey with you and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if they are
secured in a child restraint system, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and or serious personal injury. The children could
Rinjure
themselves on parts of the vehicle
Rbe
seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Rinjure
themselves or cause an accident
with vehicle equipment that can be operated even if the SmartKey is removed
from the starter switch or removed from
the vehicle, such as seat adjustment,
steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function.
If children open a door, they could injure
other persons or get out of the vehicle and
injure themselves or be injured by following
traffic.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
metal parts, for example, could become
very hot, and the child could be burned on
these parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment unless they are
firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event
of:
Rstrong braking maneuvers
Rsudden
Ran
changes of direction
accident
For more information on loading, please refer
to the “Storage compartments” (Y page 181) chapter.
Infant and child restraint systems
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
We recommend all infants and children be
properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion.
Safety and security
Occupant safety
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special
seat belt retractor for secure fastening of
child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow child
restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull
the shoulder belt out completely and let it
retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the
special seat belt retractor is activated. The
seat belt is now locked. Push down on child
restraint to take up any slack.
To deactivate, release the seat belt buckle
and let the seat belt retract completely. The
seat belt can again be used in the usual manner.
G Warning!
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
The use of infant or child restraints is required
by law in all 50 states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
Infants and small children should be seated
in an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured by a lapshoulder belt in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions for the child restraint,
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and
210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with these standards can
be found on the instruction label on the
restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
When using any infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
infant or child restraints.
G Warning!
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
The infant or child restraint must be properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt
fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Occupants, especially children, should
always sit as upright as possible, wear the
seat belt properly and use an appropriately
sized infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
booster seat recommended for the size and
weight of the child.
Children can be killed or seriously injured
by an inflating air bag. Note the following
important information:
RYour
vehicle is equipped with air bag
technology designed to deactivate the
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
when the system senses the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate
child restraint on the passenger seat.
RA
child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology installed
in your vehicle.
RIf
you install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat, make sure the
5/ indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicating that the passenger front air
bag is deactivated. Should the
5/ indicator lamp not illuminate
or go out while the restraint is installed,
61
Z
Safety and security
Panic alarm
please check installation. Periodically
check the 5/ indicator lamp
while driving to make sure the
5/ indicator lamp is illuminated.
If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out
or remains out, do not transport a child
on the passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
the passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the passenger
front air bag inflates.
RIf
you place a child in a forward-facing
child restraint on the passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible,
use the proper child restraint recommended for the age, size and weight of
the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
For children larger than the typical
12-month-old child, the passenger front
air bag may or may not be activated.
G Warning!
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
62
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position shoulder belt across chest and
shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
may be necessary to achieve proper seat
belt positioning for children over 41 lbs
until they reach a height where a lap/
shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Panic alarm
1 Â button
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
X
X
Activating: Press and hold button 1 for at
least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate briefly.
Deactivating: Press button 1 again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
or
X
Driving safety systems
Introduction
This section contains information about the
following driving safety systems:
RABS
(Antilock Brake System)
RBAS
(Brake Assist System)
RESP®
(Electronic Stability Program)
RElectro-hydraulic
i In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of most of the driving systems
described in this section is only achieved
with winter tires, or snow chains as
required.
Safety notes
G Warning!
The following factors increase the risk of
accidents:
RExcessive
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
inside the vehicle.
brake system
RWet
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle. They cannot increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that
afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with
the driving safety systems described in this
section must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users
and objects on the street.
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving safety systems may also switch off.
Observe indicator and warning lamps that
may come on as well as messages in the
multifunction display that may appear.
speed, especially in turns
and slippery road surfaces
RFollowing
another vehicle too closely
The driving safety systems described in this
section cannot reduce these risks or pre-
Z
63
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
ABS
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 63.
G Warning!
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead.
Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces
braking effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on when you switch on the
ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.
Braking
If the ABS activates during braking, the ABS/
ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster flashes. Because of the electro-
64
hydraulic brake system, you will not feel any
pulsation in the brake pedal.
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
pedal.
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to steer
the vehicle.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashes
whenever the ABS is activated. It can be an
indication for hazardous road conditions and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
while driving.
Emergency brake maneuver
X
Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.
G Warning!
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving
safety systems such as the BAS or the
ESP® are also switched off. Observe indicator and warning lamps that may come on
as well as messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may
lock during hard braking, reducing steering
capability and extending the braking distance.
For more information, see “What to do
if …?” (Y page 293).
BAS
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 63.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
very quickly, the BAS automatically provides
full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing
the braking distance.
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes
function again as normal. The BAS is then
deactivated.
G Warning!
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system
still functions, but without the additional
brake boost available that the BAS would
normally provide in an emergency braking
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
may increase.
ESP®
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 63.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running
and monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying
brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting the engine output, the ESP® works to
stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is especially
useful while driving off and on wet or slippery
road surfaces. The ESP® also stabilizes the
vehicle during braking and steering maneuvers.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on when you switch
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
engaged.
G Warning!
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v flashing in
the instrument cluster. In this case proceed
as follows:
RWhen
driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
pedal.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
speed.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut
off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
being tested on a brake test dynamometer
or when the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! The ESP® will only function properly if you
use wheels of the recommended tire size
as specified in the “Technical data” section
of this Operator’s Manual.
i The Distronic system and cruise control
switch off automatically when the ESP®
engages.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (Y page 256) and
(Y page 296).
Electronic Traction System (ETS)
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 63.
The ETS (Electronic Traction System) is a
component of the ESP®. The ETS improves
the vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under slippery road conditions by applying the brakes to a spinning
wheel.
When you switch off the ESP®, the ETS is still
enabled.
65
Z
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
Switching the ESP® off or on (except
SL 63 AMG)
G Warning!
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling the system will reduce vehicle stability in driving
maneuvers.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
the ESP® in driving situations in which it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
Rwhen
driving with snow chains
Rin
deep snow
Rin
sand or gravel
G Warning!
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to
skid or a wheel is spinning.
66
When you switch off the ESP®
Rthe
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle
Rthe
engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip
Rthe
ETS will still apply the brakes to a spinning wheel
ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking
Rthe
Ryou
cannot activate the cruise control or
the Distronic system
Rthe
cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/
ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will
then not stabilize the vehicle.
1 ESP® switch
X
Switching off: With the engine running,
press ESP® switch 1 until the ABS/ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster comes on.
The ESP® is switched off.
G Warning!
When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®.
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X
Switching on: Press ESP® switch 1 until
the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving mode
with the ESP® switched on.
SL 63 AMG
Switching ESP® SPORT on or off
G Warning!
ESP® SPORT should not be switched on
during normal driving.
Switching ESP® SPORT on will result in the
following:
Rno
restriction to engine torque
Rsystem supported traction control is lim-
ited
ESP® SPORT is designed for driving on
closed tracks when the vehicle’s natural
oversteer and understeer characteristics
are desired and requires a highly skilled and
experienced driver able to handle these
critical driving situations.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch on ESP® SPORT.
Do not switch on ESP® SPORT when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch on
ESP® SPORT in driving situations in which it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
Rwhen
driving with snow chains
Rin
deep snow
Rin
sand or gravel
G Warning!
Switch off ESP® SPORT and switch on the
ESP® immediately if the aforementioned
circumstances do not apply anymore. Otherwise ESP® SPORT will only stabilize the
vehicle to a limited extent when it is starting
to skid or a wheel is spinning.
When you switch on ESP® SPORT
ESP® stabilizes the vehicle only to a
limited extent
Rthe
Rthe engine output is limited, but only to the
extent that allows the drive wheels to spin
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip
Rthe
ETS will still apply the brakes to a spinning wheel
ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking hard
Rthe
Ryou
cannot activate the cruise control or
the Distronic system
Rthe
cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated
i When ESP® SPORT is switched on and
one or more drive wheels are spinning, the
ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster flashes. However, the
ESP® will then stabilize the vehicle only to
a limited extent.
Z
67
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
Switching the ESP® off or on
G Warning!
The ESP® should not be switched off during
normal driving.
Disabling of the system will result in the
following:
Rno
restriction to engine torque
Rloss of system supported traction control
1 ESP® SPORT switch
X
Switching on: With the engine running,
press ESP® SPORT switch 1 briefly.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster comes on. The message
ESP-SPORT appears in the multifunction
display.
X
Switching off: With the engine running,
press ESP® SPORT switch 1 briefly.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v in the
instrument cluster goes out. The message
ESP-ON appears in the multifunction display.
ESP® SPORT switches off automatically when
you turn off the engine. When starting the
engine, the ESP® is activated automatically.
68
“ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on
closed tracks when the vehicle’s natural
oversteer and understeer characteristics
are desired and requires a highly skilled and
experienced driver able to handle these
critical driving situations.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESP®.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
the ESP® in driving situations in which it
would be advantageous to have the drive
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
better grip such as:
Rwhen
driving with snow chains
Rin
deep snow
Rin
sand or gravel
G Warning!
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not
apply anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to
skid or a wheel is spinning.
When you switch off the ESP®
Rthe
ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle
Rthe
engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
into surfaces for better grip
Rthe
ETS will still apply the brakes to a spinning wheel
ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking hard
Rthe
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
Ryou
cannot activate the cruise control or
the Distronic system
ing lamp ¯ in the instrument cluster
come on.
The message ESP-OFF appears in the multifunction display.
Rthe
cruise control or the Distronic system
switch off if activated
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/
ESP® warning lamp v in the instrument
cluster does not flash. The ESP® will then
not stabilize the vehicle.
G Warning!
When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp v
and the ESP OFF warning lamp ¯ are
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
switched off. Vehicle stability in standard
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP®.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
1 ESP® switch
X
Switching off: With the engine running,
press ESP® switch 1 until the ABS/ESP®
warning lamp v and the ESP OFF warn-
X
Switching on: With the engine running,
press ESP® switch 1 briefly.
The ABS/ESP® warning lamp v and the
ESP OFF warning lamp ¯ in the instrument cluster go out. The message ESP-ON
appears in the multifunction display.
Electro-hydraulic brake system
The electro-hydraulic brake system combines
a hydraulic brake circuit with electronically
controlled brake servo assistance. You have
increased braking safety and improved braking comfort.
G Warning!
Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
indicator lamp. Refer to the “Practical
hints” section. Also read and observe the
messages in the instrument cluster multifunction display.
For information on warning and indicator
lamps, see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 293). For information on the messages that may appear in the multifunction
display, see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 269).
G Warning!
The electro-hydraulic brake system
requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
69
Z
Safety and security
Driving safety systems
red brake warning lamp comes on and
warning messages appear in the multifunction display while driving. To brake, the
driver must then apply significantly greater
brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal
much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure
to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied
to the front wheels. Stopping distance is
increased!
If there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system, we recommend
that the vehicle be transported with all
wheels off the ground using flatbed or
appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not
to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more
information, see the “Towing the vehicle”
section in this Operator’s Manual.
70
The electro-hydraulic brake system is automatically activated when you
Runlock
the vehicle with the SmartKey or
with KEYLESS-GO
Ropen
the driver’s or passenger door
Rturn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1
Rpress
the start/stop button on the gear
selector lever once (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO)
Rdepress
Rrelease
the brake pedal
the parking brake
If the electro-hydraulic brake system is activated as the brake pedal is first depressed,
you may feel a reduced pedal resistance and
longer pedal travel than normal. When releasing the pedal, you may also feel the brake
pedal pulsate and you may hear a sound
which is caused by the activation of the electro-hydraulic brake system pump. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.
Pedal travel returns to normal when you
release the brake pedal and the sound soon
ceases.
If you experience the above while driving and
the red brake warning lamp illuminates
and/or warning messages appear in the mul-
tifunction display, the brake system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions of the
warning message(s) and have the brake system checked immediately.
G Warning!
Have brake pad replacement and other
work on the electro-hydraulic brake system
carried out by qualified technicians only.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
The electro-hydraulic brake system must
be deactivated prior to working on the system. High pressure is intermittently built up
in the system as part of its automatic selftest.
In addition, the system is automatically
activated when the vehicle is unlocked by
remote control, when the driver or passenger door is opened, when the SmartKey in
the starter switch is turned to position 1 or
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button is
pressed once, when the brake pedal is
depressed or when the parking brake is
released. Failure to deactivate the system
prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak,
which may result in injuries (contusions and
acid burns). Extended brake pistons may
also cause injury.
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
The electro-hydraulic brake system switches
off automatically
Rapproximately
2 minutes after you turned
the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0 or removed the SmartKey
Rapproximately 2 minutes after you pressed
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to turn
off the engine or power supply and opened
the driver’s door (with driver’s door open,
the starter switch is set to position 0, same
as SmartKey removed from starter switch)
Rapproximately 20 seconds after you locked
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Activating
X
With the SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
X
With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
open the driver’s door.
the vehicle from outside
For more information on your vehicle’s
brakes, see the “Driving instructions” section
(Y page 237).
Deactivating
X
Switch on the ignition.
i Starting the engine will also deactivate
the immobilizer.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
charged), the system is not operational.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Anti-theft alarm system
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens:
Ra door
Rthe
trunk
Rthe
hood
Ra
storage compartment in the rear
Rthe
glove box
Rthe
storage compartment under the armrest
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately
closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered when
Rthe vehicle is raised
Rthe
vehicle is opened with the mechanical
key
Ra
door is opened from the inside
Rthe
trunk is opened with the emergency
release button
To cancel the alarm after it has been triggered, see “Canceling the
alarm” (Y page 73).
71
Z
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
lamp 1 flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
provided that you have subscribed to the
Tele Aid service and that it has been activated properly, and that the necessary
mobile phone, power supply and GPS coverage are available.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times and the acoustic warning does not
sound three times, a door or the trunk may
not be properly closed.
Close the respective element and lock the
vehicle again.
X
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
To cancel the alarm after it has been triggered, see “Canceling the
alarm” (Y page 73).
i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system
provided that you have subscribed to the
Tele Aid service and that it has been activated properly, and that the necessary
mobile phone, power supply and GPS coverage are available.
Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i The vehicle will lock and the alarm system
1 Indicator lamp
X
Arming: Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times and
an acoustic warning sounds three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
72
will rearm automatically again after approximately 40 seconds unless you open a door
or the trunk.
X
Arming: Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The tow-away alarm is armed automatically
after about 30 seconds.
X
Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until
you lock the vehicle again.
Safety and security
Anti-theft systems
Disabling tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm, disable the tow-away alarm feature before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface
subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto
train.
X
Press switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on briefly.
X
Exit and lock the vehicle.
The tow-away alarm remains disabled until
you lock the vehicle again.
Canceling the alarm
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
X
Press the k or j button on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
1 Tow-away alarm off switch
2 Indicator lamp
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X
Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
the vehicle.
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
i You cannot disable the tow-away alarm
feature with the ignition switched on.
Z
73
74
Controls in detail
Vehicle equipment .............................. 76
Locking and unlocking ....................... 76
Starter switch positions ..................... 87
Seats .................................................... 89
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 95
Mirrors ................................................. 96
Memory function ................................. 97
Lighting ................................................ 98
Wipers ................................................ 105
Power windows ................................. 107
Driving and parking ..........................
Automatic transmission ...................
Instrument cluster ............................
Control system ..................................
Driving systems ................................
Climate control system ....................
Rear window defroster .....................
Retractable hardtop .........................
Loading and storing ..........................
Useful features .................................
109
115
124
126
144
163
173
173
180
185
75
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle
might not be equipped with all features
described in this manual.
Locking and unlocking
Notes
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
When unlocking or locking the vehicle with
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust
its signal volume, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once, an acoustic signal sounds
once, the locking knobs in the doors move up,
and the anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times, an acoustic signal sounds
three times, the locking knobs in the doors
move down, and the anti-theft alarm system
is armed.
All doors and the trunk must be closed.
! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle
with the SmartKey, the batteries in the
SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is
drained.
RCheck the batteries in the SmartKey and
replace them if necessary.
RUse
the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk.
RUse
RHave
the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key.
The SmartKey locks and unlocks centrally:
Rthe
doors
Rthe
trunk lid
Rthe
fuel filler flap
Rthe
glove box
Rthe
storage compartment under the armrest
Rthe
76
the mechanical key to lock the vehi-
cle.
rear storage compartments
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
SmartKey
1 j Lock button
2 i Unlock button for trunk lid
3 k Unlock button
4
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Battery check lamp
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogramm the SmartKey so that pressing
button k only unlocks the driver’s door,
interior lockable storage compartments and
the fuel filler flap.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
k and j simultaneously for approximately 5 seconds until battery check lamp
4 (Y page 77) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Press button k once.
X
Global unlocking: Press button k
twice.
X
Global locking: Press button j.
Factory setting
X
Global unlocking: Press button k.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor trunk is opened.
X
Global locking: Press button j.
Z
77
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
KEYLESS-GO
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the validity
of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is checked
every time you grasp an outside door handle.
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid,
your vehicle unlocks
Rthe
doors
Rthe
fuel filler flap
Rthe
trunk lid
Rthe
glove box
Rthe
storage compartment under the armrest
Rthe
78
rear storage compartments
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
RYou
can also use the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 76).
RYou
can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
with button j).
RAlways
carry the SmartKey with KEYLESSGO with you.
RNever
store the SmartKey with KEYLESSGO together with:
- Electronic items such as a mobile phone
or another SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
-
Metallic objects such as coins or metal
foil
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
Doing so could impair the function of the
KEYLESS-GO system.
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
RIf
with KEYLESS-GO must be located outside
the vehicle within approximately 3 ft (1 m)
of a door or the trunk.
the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside
door handle in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
RIf
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is positioned farther away from the vehicle, the
system may no longer recognize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO. The vehicle cannot
be locked or the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO system.
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
removed from the vehicle while the engine
is running (e.g. if a passenger exits the
vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESSGO), the message Key Not Detected
appears in the multifunction display while
driving off.
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or
change its present location immediately
(e.g. place it on the passenger seat or insert
it in shirt pocket).
SmartKey in the starter switch, even stopping the engine.
RThe
vehicle could be inadvertently
unlocked if the SmartKey with KEYLESSGO is within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle and
RIf
RThis
does not apply if, after starting, the
automatic transmission is still in park position P and the SmartKey is then inserted in
the starter switch. The SmartKey will then
have priority over the KEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’s electrical system will
operate according to the position of the
an outside door handle is splashed with
water
or
-
you attempt to clean an outside door
handle
RRemember
that the engine can be started
by anyone with a SmartKey with KEYLESSGO that is left inside the vehicle. If you leave
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO behind
when exiting and locking the vehicle, the
message Key Detected In Vehicle
appears in the multifunction display.
RIf you have started the engine with the KEY-
LESS-GO start/stop button, you can only
turn it off again with this button, even if you
have put the SmartKey in the starter switch
in the meantime.
-
Factory setting
X
Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
handle.
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds if neither
door nor trunk is opened.
1 Lock button on the outside door handle
X
Global locking: Press lock button 1 on an
outside door handle.
Selective setting
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
so when you grasp the driver’s outside door
handle, only the driver’s door, interior lockable storage compartments and the fuel filler
flap unlocks.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
k and j simultaneously for approx-
Z
79
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
imately 5 seconds until battery check lamp
4 (Y page 77) flashes twice.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will then
function as follows:
X
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door handle.
X
Global unlocking: Grasp the outside door
handle on the passenger side.
X
Global locking: Press lock button 1 on an
outside door handle.
i If the batteries are checked within signal
range of the vehicle, pressing button
j or k will lock or unlock the vehicle
accordingly.
Press button j or k.
Battery check lamp 4 (Y page 77) comes
on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey
batteries are in order.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 309).
i You can obtain the required batteries at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
80
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
Loss of the SmartKey
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key to your car insurance company immediately.
X
Have the mechanical lock replaced if necessary.
Checking SmartKey batteries
X
Opening the doors from the inside
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
a door from the inside will trigger the antitheft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 73).
X Pull on inside door handle 2 on the respective door.
If the door was locked, locking knob 1 will
move up.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening a door causes its window to open
slightly. It will fully close when the door is
shut.
! A side window will not work if it is blocked
with ice or if the vehicle battery is discharged. If you cannot shut a door, do not
force it or you could damage the door or
side window. Fix whatever is affecting the
window before trying to shut the door.
Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk lock automatically
when the vehicle is set into motion.
You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
do so.
The doors are designed to unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the
impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning
at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock
yourself out when the vehicle is pushed or
towed or is on a test stand.
You can deactivate the automatic central
locking using the control system
(Y page 140).
Locking and unlocking from the inside
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside
using the central locking switches. This can
be useful, for example, if you want to lock the
vehicle before starting to drive.
The central locking switches do not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap or the interior storage compartments, such as the glove box.
X
Locking: Press central locking switch 1.
If all doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
X
Unlocking: Press central unlocking switch
2.
You can open a locked door from inside at any
time. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch:
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
door is opened from the inside
Rand
the SmartKey is set to selective settings, only the door opened from inside is
unlocked
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will
not unlock using the central unlocking switch.
1 Central locking switch
2 Central unlocking switch
Z
81
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
wise you will not be able to lower the
retractable hardtop.
Opening the trunk
G Warning!
Make sure the trunk is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
Opening the trunk from the outside
or
X
You can open the trunk when the vehicle is
stationary and the retractable hardtop is fully
opened or closed.
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.88 m)
is required to open the trunk lid.
i To facilitate trunk loading and unloading
when the hardtop is retracted, you can
raise the hardtop from its storage position
in the trunk using the load assist feature
(Y page 184). You may also unhook the
luggage cover.
Remember to re-secure the luggage cover
after loading/unloading the trunk. Other-
82
Pull on handle.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The vehicle must be unlocked.
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (Y page 86).
X Stopping the opening procedure: Press
button i on the SmartKey or pull the
trunk lid handle.
! Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system:
The trunk lid swings open upwards automatically. Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system
X Press and hold button i on the SmartKey until trunk unlocks and begins to open.
1 Trunk lid handle
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system
X Press button i on the SmartKey.
or
X
Pull on handle.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The vehicle must be unlocked.
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (Y page 86).
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the trunk from the inside
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system
Closing the trunk
G Warning!
Make sure the trunk is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
G Warning!
1 Remote trunk opening switch
2 Indicator lamp
X
X
Pull switch 1 until the trunk unlocks and
opens slightly.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on and remains lit
until the trunk is closed.
Lift the trunk lid.
1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch
2 Indicator lamp
X
Pull and hold switch 1 until the trunk
unlocks and begins to open.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on and remains lit
until the trunk is closed.
X
Release switch 1.
X
To interrupt the opening procedure:
Press or pull switch 1.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.
You may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunk
lid will lock automatically when closed. All
turn signal lamps flash three times and an
acoustic signal sounds three times to confirm
locking.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, the
trunk lid will open automatically if a SmartKey
83
Z
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
with KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the
vehicle or in the trunk.
The vehicle is only locked when the turn signal
lamps flash three times and an acoustic signal
sounds three times. If you are carrying a second SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you,
you can still lock the vehicle.
i When the hardtop is retracted, it must be
completely lowered in the trunk before the
trunk can be closed (Y page 173).
Closing the trunk from the outside manually
1 Handle
84
X
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on handle
1.
result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
X
Close trunk with hands placed flat on trunk
lid.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
been piled too high) in the upper motion
sequence, the closing procedure is stopped
and the trunk reopens slightly.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system you can close the trunk from the inside
using the remote trunk opening/ closing
switch.
The power closing assist automatically
ensures that the trunk lid is pulled completely
close (Y page 87).
Closing the trunk from the inside automatically
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear
of the vehicle while operating the trunk lid
with the door mounted switch. Monitor the
closing procedure carefully to make sure no
one is in danger of being injured.
To interrupt the closing procedure, release
the door mounted remote trunk opening/
closing switch again.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the
remote trunk opening/closing switch can
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
1 Remote trunk opening/closing switch
2 Indicator lamp
X
Press and hold switch 1 until the trunk is
closed.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes out
when the trunk is closed.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
To interrupt the closing procedure:
X Release switch 1.
Closing the trunk from the outside automatically
G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal
injury, always keep hands and fingers away
from the trunk opening when closing the
trunk lid. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing
procedure, do one of the following:
RPress button i on the SmartKey.
be operated. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. A child’s
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system you can close the trunk separately from
the outside using the trunk closing switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
1 Trunk closing switch
X
RPress
the remote trunk opening/closing
switch (on the driver’s door).
RPress
the trunk closing switch.
RPress
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch.
RPull
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO
1 Trunk closing switch
Press switch 1 briefly.
Closing the trunk and locking vehicle from
outside
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing system and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.
the trunk lid handle.
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the
remote trunk opening/closing switch can
Z
85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Trunk lid emergency release
With the emergency release button, the trunk
lid can be opened from inside the trunk.
The emergency release button does not
unlock the trunk, if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.
Valet locking
To deny any unauthorized person access to
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle, lock it separately with the mechanical
key. Leave only the SmartKey less its
mechanical key with the vehicle.
1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
X
Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
X
Press switch 1 briefly.
With all doors closed:
RThe locking knobs in the doors move
down.
RThe
trunk lid starts to close automatically.
RAll
turn signal lamps flash three times
once the trunk has closed completely.
RAn
acoustic signal sounds three times
once the trunk has closed completely.
RThe
anti-theft alarm system is armed.
1 Emergency release button
X
Briefly press emergency release button
1.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.
X
Push up the trunk lid to fully open.
The emergency release button unlocks the
trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in
motion.
Illumination of the emergency release button:
RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after
opening the trunk.
RThe
button flashes for 60 minutes after
closing the trunk.
86
$ Neutral position
% Locked
X
Close the trunk.
X
Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 307).
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
X
Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
lock.
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position % and remove the mechanical key in
that position to lock the trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when the vehicle is centrally unlocked.
You can only cancel the separate trunk locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
lock.
X
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise
to neutral position $ and remove the
mechanical key in that position to unlock
the trunk.
You can now open the trunk.
Power closing assist for trunk lid
It is not necessary to slam the trunk lid
closed. An electrical power-assisted mechanism draws the trunk lid closed quietly and
automatically once the trunk lid has been
latched. When the electrical power-assisted
mechanism has stopped, the trunk can be reopened.
Starter switch positions
SmartKey
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
In case of danger, pull the inside or outside
door handle, or press the trunk lid lock.
To prevent personal injury, never actuate
the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
G Warning!
Make sure the trunk is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
X
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
} For removing SmartKey (gear selector
lever must be in park position P)
$ Power supply for some electrical consum-
ers, e.g. radio
% Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
& Starting position
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except high-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a
lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come
on when the ignition is switched on, have it
87
Z
Controls in detail
Starter switch positions
checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp
in the instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while driving,
refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 293).
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not
be sufficiently charged.
RCheck the vehicle battery and charge it
if necessary.
RGet
a jump start.
To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge or a completely discharged vehicle
battery, always remove the SmartKey from
the starter switch when the engine is not in
operation.
KEYLESS-GO
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO feature are supplied with a SmartKey with integrated KEYLESS-GO function.
With the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO present
in the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button
Rwithout
the brake pedal depressed corresponds to the various starter switch positions (Y page 87)
the brake pedal firmly depressed will
start the engine (Y page 109)
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
Rwith
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
X
Do not depress the brake pedal.
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Position 1
X
88
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as radio functions.
Controls in detail
Seats
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button
more, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
Ronce
Rtwice
more the power supply is again
switched off
Ignition (or position 2)
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
twice.
This supplies power for all electrical consumers.
All lamps (except high-beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument
cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the ignition
is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving,
refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 293).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button once, the power supply is again
switched off.
Seats
Safety notes
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control all seat, head restraint, steering
wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as
well as fastening of seat belts, must be
done before the vehicle is put into motion.
G Warning!
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest
and seat belts provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in a position that is as
upright as possible and seat belts are properly positioned on the body.
G Warning!
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Observe the following points:
RAdjust
the seat backrest until your arms
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel.
RAdjust
the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
controls properly.
RAdjust
the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being
adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any
time. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
89
Z
Controls in detail
Seats
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
G Warning!
Children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional information, see section “Children in
the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
! When moving the seats, make sure there
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats.
Power seat
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat height
3 Seat cushion tilt
4 Seat cushion depth
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
6 Seat backrest tilt
i The memory function (Y page 97) lets
you store the settings for the seat position
90
together with the settings for the steering
wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.
Seat adjustment
X
Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow 5.
i When moving the seat fore or aft, the head
restraints may readjust automatically.
X
Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow 2.
X
Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
down in direction of arrow 3 until your
upper legs are lightly supported.
X
Seat cushion depth: Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 4
until your legs are supported comfortably.
X
Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch forward or backward in direction of arrow
6.
X
Head restraint height: Press the switch
up or down in direction of arrow 1.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
close to the head as possible and the center
Controls in detail
Seats
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats.
of the head restraint supports the back of
the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in
the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the seat’s lumbar support to help enhance support to your
spine.
Moving the seats forward and backward
You can move the seats forward and backward to facilitate loading and unloading.
G Warning!
When moving the seats, make sure no one
can be caught by them. Never place hands
under seat or near any moving parts during
a seat adjustment procedure. To stop the
seat from moving when potential danger
exists:
RPress
the switch once more.
RMove
the seat adjustment switch on the
1 Seat forward
2 Seat backward
X
X
Moving the seat forward: Press switch at
1 and release.
The seat moves forward automatically.
1 Thumbwheel
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Set the lumbar support between 0 and 5.
Moving the seat backward: Press switch
at 2 and release.
The seat moves backwards to its previous
position automatically.
door.
! When moving the seats, make sure there
Z
are no items in the footwell or behind the
91
Controls in detail
Seats
Multicontour seat
The multicontour seat backrest has inflatable
air cushions built into the seat backrest to
provide additional lumbar and side support.
The seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches
on the lower left side (driver’s seat) or the
lower right side (passenger side) of the seat
when the ignition is switched on.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Shoulder region support: Press + or
- on switch 2.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
X
Lumbar region support: Press k or
j on rocker switch 1.
This selects the air cushion you wish to
adjust.
X
Press + or - on rocker switch 1.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.
X
Side bolsters adjustment: Press switch
3 to the right or left.
The lateral support increases or decreases.
Massage function (PULSE)
1 Lumbar region support
2 Shoulder region support
3 Side bolsters adjustment
4 Massage function (PULSE)
You can reduce muscle tension during long
trips by periodically using the massage function.
X Press button 4.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate
and deflate rhythmically.
Seat ventilation
1 Seat ventilation switch
The blue indicator lamps in the switch come
on to show which ventilation level you have
selected.
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
can be activated using summer opening
feature (Y page 175).
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on: Press switch 1.
Three blue indicator lamps in the switch
come on.
X
Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
desired ventilation level is set.
X
Switching off: Press switch 1 repeatedly
until all indicator lamps go out.
i The massage function switches off automatically after approximately 8 minutes.
The indicator lamp goes out.
92
Controls in detail
Seats
If one or more of the indicator lamps in the
seat ventilation switch 1 are flashing, there
is insufficient voltage available since too
many electrical consumers are turned on. The
seat ventilation switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
Seat heating
The red indicator lamps in the switch come
on to show which heating level you have
selected.
The seat heating switches from level 2 (rapid
seat heating) to level 1 (normal seat heating)
after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating automatically switches off
after approximately 30 minutes.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on seat heating: Press lower
switch position 2.
A red indicator lamp in the switch comes
on.
X
Switching off seat heating: Press lower
switch position 2 once more.
X
Switching on rapid seat heating: Press
upper switch position 1.
Both red indicator lamps in the switch
come on.
X
Switching off rapid seat heating: Press
upper switch position 1 once more.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
Vehicles without seat ventilation
1 Rapid heating
2 Normal heating
If one or both of the indicator lamps in the
seat heating switch are flashing, there is
insufficient voltage available since too many
electrical consumers are turned on. The seat
heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
Vehicles with seat ventilation
1 Seat heating switch
The red indicator lamps in the switch come
on to show which heating level you have
selected.
The seat heating switches from level 2 (rapid
seat heating) to level 1 (normal seat heating)
after approximately 8 minutes.
The seat heating automatically switches off
after approximately 30 minutes.
Z
93
Controls in detail
Seats
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on seat heating: Press switch
1.
Both red indicator lamps in switch 1 come
on.
X
Switching off seat heating: Press switch
1 repeatedly until all red indicator lamps
go out.
If one or both of the indicator lamps in the
seat heating switch are flashing, there is
insufficient voltage available since too many
electrical consumers are turned on. The seat
heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
AIRSCARF neck-level heating
The AIRSCARF neck-level heating provides
the area surrounding the occupants’ necks
with a heated air stream flowing from openings in the head restraints.
Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on: Press AIRSCARF switch 1
for the desired side.
All three indicator lamps on respective AIRSCARF switch 1 come on. After a preheating time of approximately 10 seconds,
the blower starts.
X
Press AIRSCARF switch 1 repeatedly until
the desired AIRSCARF heating level for the
corresponding seat is reached.
X
Switching off: Press AIRSCARF switch
1 repeatedly until all indicator lamps on
AIRSCARF switch 1 go out.
G Warning!
When switching on the AIRSCARF necklevel heating, the air streaming from the
openings may be very hot. When in close
proximity to the openings, you could be
seriously burned. To help avoid serious personal injuries, switch the AIRSCARF to a
lower heating level.
After switching off the AIRSCARF neck-level
heating, the AIRSCARF fan continues to operate for approximately 7 seconds to cool down
the heater elements.
1 AIRSCARF switch
94
X
Controls in detail
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel
Steering wheel adjustment
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in its
uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Convenience submenu
of the control system (Y page 140).
Safety notes
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving could cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
G Warning!
1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out
2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down
X
Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move
stalk in direction of arrows 1.
X
Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
Move stalk in direction of arrows 2.
Make sure
Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows
Ryou
can move your legs freely
Rall displays (including malfunction and indi-
cator lamps) on the instrument cluster are
clearly visible
Easy-entry/exit feature
i The memory function (Y page 97) lets
you store the settings for the steering
wheel together with the settings for the
seat position and the exterior rear view mirrors.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, move
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press
one of the memory position buttons or
memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door
and unintentionally activate the easyentry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
95
Z
Controls in detail
Mirrors
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button once with the driver’s door closed.
i The last set steering wheel position is
stored when the ignition is switched off or
the position is stored in memory
(Y page 98).
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.
i When the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
steering wheel will no longer be able to
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted when the engine is started.
G Warning!
Let the system complete the adjustment
procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
96
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
Interior rear view mirror
X
Adjust the interior rear view mirror manually.
For more information, see “Auto-dimming
rear view mirrors” (Y page 97).
Exterior rear view mirrors
G Warning!
Exercise care when using the passengerside exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in
mirror are closer than they appear. Check
your interior rear view mirror or glance over
your shoulder before changing lanes.
Controls in detail
Memory function
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror but-
ton
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
button
3 Adjustment button
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button 1 for the driver’s side exterior rear view mirror or button 2 for the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
X
Press adjustment button 3 up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
The reflection brightness of the exterior rear
view mirror on the driver’s side and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when the ignition is switched on
and incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mirror.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the automatic transmission is set to reverse gear R or
the interior lighting is switched on.
G Warning!
The auto dimming function does not react
if incoming light is not aimed directly at
sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do
not react, for example, if the wind screen is
installed.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
Memory function
Notes
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations.
Each stored position on the driver’s side
includes the following settings:
RSeat
position and lumbar support
RSteering
RExterior
wheel position
rear view mirrors’ position
G Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
Each stored position on the passenger side
includes the following settings:
RSeat
position and lumbar support
RMulticontour seat: previously saved setting
Z
97
Controls in detail
Lighting
Recalling positions from memory
X
Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, on the
driver’s side also the steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors, have completely
moved to the stored positions.
i Releasing the memory position button
stops movement to the stored positions
immediately.
1 Memory position button
2 Memory button M
Storing positions into memory
X
Adjust the seats, on the driver’s side also
the steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors, to the desired positions.
X
Press memory button M.
X
Release memory button M and press memory position button 1, 2 or 3 within 3 seconds.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
98
Lighting
Notes
i If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than the
country where the vehicle is registered, you
must have the headlamps modified for
symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps monitor
the vehicle’s steering angle and speed,
then automatically shift their beams to
either side to better follow the curvature of
the road ahead, increasing usable illumination over conventional headlamps.
Controls in detail
Lighting
starter switch or open the driver’s door with
the ignition switched off.
When the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp are switched on and you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch or open
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal
sounds.
In addition the message Lights Are
Still On appears in the multifunction display.
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp manually.
Exterior lamp switch
$ a Standing lamps, left
% g Standing lamps, right
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps
when leaving the vehicle may result in a
discharged battery.
& M Off
(U
)C
*B
,¥
.†
Daytime running lamp mode
Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps
Front fog lamps
Rear fog lamp
i The exterior lamps go out automatically
when you remove the SmartKey from the
RLicense
RSide
marker lamps
RInstrument
lamp switch
X
Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position M.
Automatic headlamp mode
The following lamps come on and go out automatically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light:
RLow-beam
Low-beam headlamps
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on
and off with the exterior lamp switch using the
manual headlamp mode.
X Switch on the ignition.
RSide
RTail
headlamps
and parking lamps
RLicense
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B.
The following lamps come on:
RLow-beam headlamps
panel lamps
RGreen indicator lamp C in the exterior
RTail
X
plate lamps
plate lamps
marker lamps
G Warning!
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
the headlamps will not automatically come
on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
Z
and parking lamps
99
Controls in detail
Lighting
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible
for the operation of the vehicle’s lights at
all times.
X
Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position U.
With the SmartKey in starter switch position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button pressed once, the tail and parking
lamps, the license plate lamps and the side
marker lamps will come on and go out
depending on the brightness of the ambient
light.
When the engine is running the low-beam
headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the
license plate lamps and the side marker
lamps will come on and go out depending
on the brightness of the ambient light.
Canada only:
100
High-beam headlamps are only available with
the exterior lamp switch in position B.
Daytime running lamp mode
In Canada the daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
In the USA the daytime running lamp mode is
deactivated by default. Activate the daytime
running lamp mode using the control system,
see “Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)” (Y page 138).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
M or U.
When the engine is running, the low-beam
headlamps come on.
In low ambient lighting conditions, the following lamps will come on additionally:
RTail
and parking lamps
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, you cannot
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually.
Canada only
With the exterior lamp switch in position
M or U, you cannot switch on the highbeam headlamps.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B to permit activation
of the high-beam headlamps.
When the engine is running, and you
Rshift from a driving position to neutral posi-
tion N or park position P with the vehicle at
a standstill, the low-beam headlamps will
go out with a delay of 3 minutes.
Rturn
the exterior lamp switch to position
C, the low-beam headlamps, the tail
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps
and the side marker lamps come on.
Rturn
the exterior lamp switch to position
B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 99).
USA only
You can only switch on the high-beam headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
Controls in detail
Lighting
When the engine is running, and you turn the
exterior lamp switch to position C or
B, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 99).
Fog lamps
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
exterior lamp switch in position U. To
switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior
lamp switch to position B first.
G Warning!
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B
with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe
location.
Switching from U to B will briefly
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps
and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
C or B (Y page 99).
X
Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to first stop.
The green indicator lamp ¥ in the exterior lamp switch comes on.
X
Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps and
the yellow indicator lamp † in the exterior lamp switch come on.
X
Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop.
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the “Control system”
section, see “Setting locator lighting” (Y page 138) and “Setting night security
illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)” (Y page 139).
Combination switch
1 High beam
2 High-beam flasher
High beam
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
B (Y page 99).
X
Switching on: Push the combination
switch in direction of arrow 1.
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
A in the instrument cluster comes on.
X
Switching off: Pull the combination switch
in direction of arrow 2 to its original position.
Z
101
Controls in detail
Lighting
High-beam flasher
X
Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow 2.
Turn signals
i To signal minor directional changes such
as changing lanes, press combination
switch only to point of resistance and
release. The corresponding turn signal
lamps will flash three times.
X
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left or
right turn signals will operate when the ignition is switched on.
Hazard warning flasher
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
X
The hazard warning flasher can be switched
on at all times, even with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch or with the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from
the vehicle.
The hazard warning flasher comes on automatically when an air bag deploys.
The hazard warning flasher switch is located
on the upper part of the center console.
Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow 1 or 2.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
lamp L or K in the instrument cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements.
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
102
Switching on: Press hazard warning
flasher switch 1.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
X
Switching off: Press hazard warning
flasher switch 1 again.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard
warning flasher switch 1 once to switch
off.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Headlamp cleaning system
For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 208).
Corner-illuminating lamps
1 Headlamp cleaning button
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button 1.
The headlamps are cleaned with a highpressure water jet.
The headlamps will automatically be cleaned
when you have
Rswitched
on the headlamps
and
Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the wind-
shield with washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
The corner-illuminating lamps improve illumination of the area in the direction into which
you are turning.
The corner-illuminating lamps will only operate in low ambient lighting conditions.
If you are driving faster than 43 mph
(70 km/h) the corner-illuminating function is
not available.
Switching on
X
Make sure the engine is running.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
B or U (Y page 99).
or
X
Activate the daytime running lamp mode
(Y page 100).
X
Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective corner-illuminating lamp
comes on. If you have switched on the turn
signal for one side but turn the steering
wheel in the other direction, the cornerilluminating lamp comes on on the side of
the turn signal.
or
X
Turn steering wheel in desired direction.
Driving forward: The corner-illuminating
lamp on the side of your steering direction
comes on.
Driving in reverse: The corner-illuminating
lamp opposite to your steering direction
comes on.
The corner-illuminating lamps will come on
automatically depending on the steering
angle, even if you did not switch on either turn
signal. If the corner-illuminating lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle
and vehicle speed.
The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily
come on on both sides of the vehicle if you
turn the steering wheel in one direction and
then again in the other direction shortly thereafter.
The corner-illuminating lamp remains lit for a
maximum of 3 minutes. Afterward, it goes out
even if the turn signal is still switched on.
103
Z
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching off
Automatic control
X
X
Switch off the left or right turn signal.
or
X
Steer straight ahead.
The corner-illuminating lamp goes out.
Rremove
i There may be a brief delay before the cor-
The interior lighting controls are located in
the overhead control panel.
the SmartKey from the starter
switch
ner-illuminating lamps go out.
Interior lighting
Activating: Slide switch 4 to the left.
The interior lighting and the entry/exit
lamps come on in darkness, when you:
Runlock the vehicle
X
Ropen
a door
Ropen
the trunk
Deactivating: Slide switch 4 to the right.
4 Slide switch for automatic control
104
Switching on/off reading lamps: Press
respective switch X.
Courtesy lighting
For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
lamps will illuminate the interior of your vehicle as follows:
With parking lamps switched on:
door handles
Rthe
driver and passenger footwells
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
With SmartKey in starter switch position 1:
! An interior lamp switched on manually
3 ð Interior lighting on/off
X
Rthe
Manual control
2 X Right reading lamp on/off
Switching on/off interior lighting: Press
switch ð.
The interior lighting goes out after a preset
time (Y page 140).
go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
1 X Left reading lamp on/off
X
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with
the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery.
Rthe
door handles
Rthe
center console
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the
headlamps, the door handle lamps will
remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.
Controls in detail
Wipers
Wipers
Notes
! Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on a
windshield might scratch the glass and/or
damage the wiper blades when wiping
occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary
to operate the wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate the wipers with
washer fluid.
Windshield wipers
Switching windshield wipers on/off
0
Windshield wipers off
I
Intermittent wiping
II
Normal wiper speed
III Fast wiper speed
X
Turn the combination switch in direction of
arrow 1 to the desired position, depending on the intensity of the rain.
Intermittent wiping
Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
weather conditions or in the presence of precipitation.
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
Combination switch
1 Switching on windshield wipers
2 Single wipe
Wiping with washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
operate in the presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and windshield wipers
may be damaged as a result.
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
the surface of the rain sensor or optical
effects may cause the windshield wipers to
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could
then damage the windshield wiper blades
or scratch the windshield. You should
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.
Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on
wetness of windshield. After the initial wipe,
pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor.
X Turn the combination switch to position I.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.
This protects persons getting into or out of
the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
doors are closed and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive position D or reverse gear R
or
Rthe wiper setting is changed using the com-
bination switch
Z
105
Controls in detail
Wipers
Single wipe
X
Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow 2 to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid.
Wiping with washer fluid
X
Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with washer
fluid.
Problems with wipers
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.
RFor safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a
safe location and
- remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
or
-
turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
open the driver’s door (with the
driver’s door open, starter switch is in
position 0, same as with SmartKey
removed from starter switch)
-
engage the parking brake
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
washer fluid every now and then even when
it is raining.
For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 208).
For information on cleaning the headlamps
with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
system” (Y page 103).
106
before attempting to remove any blockage.
- Remove blockage.
-
Turn the windshield wipers on again.
If the windshield wipers fail to function at
all with the combination switch in position
I,
Rset
the combination switch to the next
higher wiper speed
Rhave
the windshield wipers checked at
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing
The windows are opened and closed electrically. The switches for all windows are located
on the driver’s door. The switch for operating
the passenger-side windows is located on the
passenger door.
G Warning!
When closing the windows, make sure
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
by the closing procedure.
The door windows are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode a
door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path, the automatic reversal
function will stop the door window and
open it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pressed and held. See the
“Closing when a door window is blocked”
section for details.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch
or, if the switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
The closing of the rear side windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch.
If a window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path in a circumstance where you
are closing the windows by pressing and
holding button j on the SmartKey or by
pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door
handle the automatic reversal function will
not operate.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
i You can also open or close the windows
using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening
feature” (Y page 175) and “Convenience
closing feature” (Y page 175).
1 Left door and rear side window
2 Right door and rear side window
Door windows
i When you open the door windows while
the hardtop is open, the rear side windows
will also open automatically.
i After switching off the ignition or removing the SmartKey from the starter switch,
you can operate the windows until you
open a door. If no door was opened you can
operate the windows for up to 5 minutes.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Opening/Closing: Press or pull and hold
switch 1 or 2 to the resistance point.
The corresponding door window will move
downwards or upwards until you release
the switch.
Z
107
Controls in detail
Power windows
X
X
Express operation: Press or pull switch
1 or 2 past the resistance point and
release.
The corresponding door window opens or
closes completely.
Stopping during Express operation:
Press or pull the respective switch again.
Closing when a door window is blocked
G Warning!
Make sure that nobody can become trapped and be seriously or even fatally injured
when closing a door window with greater
force or without automatic reversal function.
If the upward movement of a door window is
blocked during the closing procedure, the
door window will stop and open slightly. However, the door window will exert greater force
before reversing than when the door window
is closed in express operation. Please exercise caution!
X
Immediately after the door window has
stopped because it was blocked, pull the
respective switch upwards until the door
window is fully closed.
108
If the door window is blocked again and opens
slightly:
X
Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull the respective switch
upwards until the door window is fully
closed.
G Warning!
Pressing and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door window to close without any reversal function
for as long as you hold the switch.
Opening and closing the rear side windows
X
Opening: Open the door window.
X
Press switch 1 or 2 again.
The corresponding rear side window will
open completely.
X
Closing: Close the door window.
X
Pull and hold switch 1 or 2.
The corresponding rear side window will
move upwards until you release the switch.
Closing with KEYLESS-GO
When locking the vehicle, you can simultaneously close the windows.
X Press and hold the lock button on an outside door handle (Y page 79) until the windows are completely closed.
X
Release the lock button on the outside door
handle to interrupt the closing procedure.
Synchronizing power windows
The windows must be synchronized after the
battery has been disconnected or if the windows cannot be fully closed (Express operation).
Each power window must be synchronized
separately.
X Close all doors.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Pull and hold switch 1 or 2
(Y page 107) until the respective window is
closed.
The window opens again slightly.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
X
X
Pull and hold the respective switch once
more immediately until the window is completely closed.
Driving and parking
Starting the engine
Safety notes
G Warning!
Hold the respective switch for approximately 1 second.
The window is synchronized.
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets
in the footwell, make sure the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
and injury.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible
death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under
these conditions, drive only with at least
one window fully open at all times.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
Z
109
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Automatic transmission
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 (Y page 87) and release it.
The engine starts automatically.
Starting with KEYLESS-GO
G Warning!
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
Á Park position with gear selector lever lock
 Reverse gear
À Neutral position
¿ Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic transmission” (Y page 115).
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
Starting with the SmartKey
X
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
110
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle,
the vehicle can be started. Therefore, never
leave children unattended in the vehicle, as
they could otherwise accidentally start the
engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
A child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
You can start your vehicle without the SmartKey in the starter switch using the KEYLESSGO start/stop button on the gear selector
lever.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only
2 Canada only
X
Depress the brake pedal during the starting
procedure.
X
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
once.
The engine starts automatically.
Starting difficulties
! Remember that extended starting
attempts can drain the battery.
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
The engine does not start. You can hear
the starter.
There could be a malfunction in the engine
electronics or in the fuel supply system.
Carry out the following steps:
X
X
If you are starting the engine with the
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting
procedure.
If you are starting the engine with KEYLESSGO: Close any doors that may be open to
allow for better detection of the SmartKey.
or
X
X
Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
signals from another source may be interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after several starting attempts:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The engine does not start. You cannot
hear the starter.
The battery may not be sufficiently charged.
X Get a jump start (Y page 328).
If the engine will not start despite a jump
start:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
The starter has been exposed to excessive
temperatures.
X Let the starter cool for about two minutes.
X
Repeat the starting procedure.
If the engine does not start after several starting attempts:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Driving off
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service life
of the engine. This is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
SL 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below
68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speed
is restricted in order to protect it from damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full speed
when the engine is cold to prevent premature engine wear and/or diminished comfort.
! If you hear a warning signal and the mes-
sage Release Parking Brake appears in
the multifunction display when driving off,
you have forgotten to release the parking
brake.
Release the parking brake.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces
engine performance and causes premature
brake and drivetrain wear which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
111
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the auto-
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Only depressing the brake pedal releases
the gear selector lever lock.
matic central locking system engages and
the locking knobs in the doors move down.
The automatic door lock feature can be
deactivated (Y page 140).
Automatic transmission
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone
or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the automatic transmission could be damaged.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
112
X
Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
If engaged, release the parking brake.
X
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission
shifts at a higher engine revolution. This
allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
For more information on driving, see “Driving
instructions” (Y page 236).
Problems while driving
The engine runs erratically and misfires
RAn
ignition cable may be damaged.
RThe
engine electronics may not be operating properly.
RUnburned gasoline may have entered the
catalytic converter and damaged it.
X
Give very little gas.
X
Have the problem checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
The coolant temperature is above
248‡ (120†)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
the engine.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
as possible.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant if
necessary (Y page 207).
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
In case of accident
Parking
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
G Warning!
X
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
X
Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
roadway.
X
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
If no damage can be determined on the
Rmajor
Rfuel
assemblies
system
Rengine
X
mount:
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as grass, hay
or leaves can come into contact with the
hot exhaust system, as these materials
could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of serious personal
injury, or damage to the vehicle or the vehicle drivetrain, as a result of vehicle movement, always do the following before
turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle:
RKeep
right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage
the parking brake.
RShift
the automatic transmission into
park position P.
RSlowly
release the brake pedal.
RWhen
parked on an incline, always turn
the front wheels towards the road curb.
RTurn
the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
Parking brake
G Warning!
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle is in motion can cause the rear wheels
to lock up. You could lose control of the
vehicle and cause an accident. In addition,
the vehicle’s brake lights do not light up
when the parking brake is engaged.
G Warning!
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the SmartKey from the starter switch, take
it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/
or shift the automatic transmission out of
park position P, either of which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Z
113
Controls in detail
Driving and parking
Turning off the engine
G Warning!
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
has come to a complete stop. With the
engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems.
In this case, it is important to keep in mind
that a considerably higher degree of effort
is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
1 Release handle
2 Parking brake pedal
X
X
X
X
Releasing: Pull on release handle 1.
When the ignition is switched on or the
engine is running, the brake warning
lamp ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada
only) in the instrument cluster goes out.
Engaging: Step firmly on parking brake
pedal 2.
When the engine is running, the brake
warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
comes on.
114
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
Engage the parking brake.
i Always engage the parking brake in addition to shifting the automatic transmission
into park position P.
When parked on an incline, also turn the
front wheels towards the road curb.
Turning off with SmartKey
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
The immobilizer is activated.
The SmartKey can only be removed from the
starter switch with the automatic transmission in park position P.
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO
X
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s
door opened, the starter switch is set to
position 0, same as the SmartKey removed
from the starter switch (Y page 87).
If you hear a warning signal, you have tried to
turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button while the automatic transmission was not in park position P.
Read and observe messages that may appear
in the multifunction display (Y page 265).
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission
Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking” (Y page 109).
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets
in the footwell, make sure the pedals still
have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
and injury.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load
use. Do not place full load on the engine
until the operating temperature has been
reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces.
This may cause serious damage to the
engine and the drivetrain which is not cov-
ered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to
operating temperature.
Gear selector lever
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic transmission out of park position P or neutral
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could
lose control of the vehicle and hit someone
or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your
right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R or park position P when the
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the automatic transmission could be damaged.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
Á Park position with gear selector lever lock
 Reverse gear
À Neutral position
¿ Drive position
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed.
Only depressing the brake pedal releases
the gear selector lever lock.
i The current gear selector lever position
corresponds with the current transmission
position.
The current transmission position P, R, N,
or D appears in the right multifunction display (Y page 116).
115
Z
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
There are additional indicators on the cover
of the shifting gate showing the current gear
selector lever position.
The indicators come on when you insert the
SmartKey into the starter switch, and go out
when you remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on:
Rdrive position D (Y page 117) with gear
ranges (Y page 118)
selected program mode:
C/S (Y page 118)
or
M (SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG only)
(Y page 121)
With drive position D selected, you can influence transmission shifting by:
Rlimiting
the gear range
Rextending
the gear range
Rchanging
the gears manually (SL 63 AMG
and SL 65 AMG only)
Transmission positions
The current transmission position appears in
the right multifunction display.
Rthe
Rthe
position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe
vehicle speed
116
1 Transmission position indicator
Effect
ì
Park position
Shift the automatic transmission
into park position P only when the
vehicle is stopped. The park position is not intended to serve as a
brake when the vehicle is parked.
Rather, the driver should always
engage the parking brake in addition to shifting the automatic
transmission into park position P
to secure the vehicle.
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in park
position P. With the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch,
the gear selector lever is locked in
park position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
malfunctioning, the gear selector
lever could remain locked in park
position P.
X Have the vehicle’s electrical
system checked as soon as pos-
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Effect
sible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
í
ë
Reverse gear
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Effect
Effect
Neutral position
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When the
brakes are released, the vehicle
can be moved freely (pushed or
towed).
To avoid damage to the transmission, never shift the automatic
transmission into neutral position
N while driving.
If the ESP® is deactivated or malfunctioning: Shift the automatic
transmission into neutral position
N only if the vehicle is in danger of
skidding, e.g. on icy roads.
The automatic transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears
are available.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with the
automatic transmission in neutral position N can result in
transmission damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
ê
Drive position
Driving tips
Kickdown
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the automatic transmission shifts into a lower gear.
You may encounter a resistance point. If so,
depress the accelerator pedal past this resistance point.
Working on the vehicle
G Warning!
When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which could
117
Z
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive position D and driving in automatic program mode
C or S, you can limit or extend the gear range,
see “One-touch gearshifting” (Y page 120).
The current gear range appears in the right
multifunction display.
Automatic shift program
Effect
è With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
ç Allows the use of engine’s braking
power when driving
Ron steep downgrades
Rin
mountainous regions
Runder
extreme operating condi-
tions
æ For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy
downgrades.
1 Gear range indicator
118
Program mode selector switch
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
“RACE START
(SL 63 AMG)” (Y page 156).
The current program mode appears in the
right multifunction display.
1 Program mode indicator
Program mode selector dial on SL 63 AMG
C Comfort
i SL 63 AMG: In addition, the currently
For standard driving
S Sport
For sporty driving
S+ Sport Plus
For sporty driving with
shorter shift times
M Manual
For manual gearshifting
(Y page 121)
RS RACE START For optimum acceleration from a standing
start
Program mode selector switch on SL 65 AMG
C Comfort
For comfort driving
S Sport
For standard driving
M MANUAL
For manual gearshifting
(Y page 121)
selected program mode is indicated in red
on the program mode selector dial.
! Never change the program mode when
the automatic transmission is out of park
position P. This could result in a change of
driving characteristics for which you may
not be prepared.
i The last selected automatic program
mode (C or S) is switched on when the
engine is restarted.
i SL 63 AMG: Automatic program mode
i Program mode RS cannot be selected
while driving. For more information, see
S+ will not be stored. When the engine is
turned off with automatic program mode
S+ selected, the automatic transmission
119
Z
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
will go to automatic program mode (C or
S) when the engine is restarted.
X
All models except SL 63 AMG: Press the
program mode selector switch repeatedly
until the letter of the desired program mode
appears in the right multifunction display.
X
SL 63 AMG: Turn the program mode selector dial until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the right multifunction display.
Selecting program mode C means:
RThe
vehicle starts out more gentle, both
forward and reverse, except when driving
off with full throttle.
RTraction
and driving stability are improved
on icy roads.
RUpshifts
occur earlier even when you give
more gas. The engine then operates at
lower rpms and the wheels are less likely
to spin.
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.
One-touch gearshifting
With the automatic transmission in drive position D and driving in automatic program mode
C or S, you can limit or extend the gear range
using the gear selector lever or the steering
wheel gearshift contol.
U.S. vehicles: Steering wheel gearshift control is available on vehicles with AMG Sport
Package, on SL 63 AMG, and on SL 65 AMG
only.
SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG: For information
on using the gear selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift control in manual program
mode M, see “Manual shift program” (Y page 121).
Steering wheel gearshift control (example illustration)
1 Limiting gear range
Downshift (in manual program mode M)
2 Extending gear range
Upshift (in manual program mode M)
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift control when the automatic transmission is in park position P, neutral position N, or reverse gear R.
Limiting gear range
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
120
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
X
Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
left in the D- direction.
i If you press on the accelerator pedal
when the engine has reached its rpm limit,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
or
X
Briefly pull left gearshift control 1.
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next lower gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously
limits the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
i To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting, the automatic transmission
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
Canceling gear range limit
X
Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
or
X
Briefly pull right gearshift control 2.
The automatic transmission will shift into
the next higher gear as permitted by the
shift program. This action simultaneously
Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction until D reappears in the right multifunction display.
or
X
Extending gear range
X
mal acceleration and deceleration. This will
involve shifting down one or more gears.
Pull and hold right gearshift control 2 until
D reappears in the right multifunction display.
The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into drive
position D.
Manual shift program
The manual shift program is available on
SL 63 AMG and on SL 65 AMG only.
Manual program mode M differs with regard
to spontaneity, response time, and shifting
smoothness from automatic program modes
S or S+ (SL 63 AMG only).
In manual program mode M, system-controlled automatic gearshifting is switched off.
You need to change the gears by manually
upshifting or downshifting using the gear
selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift
control.
Shifting into optimal gear range
X
Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the left in the D- direction.
or
X
Pull and hold left gearshift control 1.
The automatic transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for opti-
Z
Program mode selector dial on SL 63 AMG
121
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
C Comfort
For standard driving
C Comfort
For comfort driving
ing is switched off. The gear range is not
limited.
S Sport
For sporty driving
S Sport
For standard driving
S+ Sport Plus
For sporty driving with
shorter shift times
M MANUAL
For manual gearshifting
You can change the gears manually with drive
position D selected. You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succession.
M Manual
For manual gearshifting
RS RACE START For optimum acceleration from a standing
start
i Program mode RS cannot be selected
while driving. For more information, see
“RACE START
(SL 63 AMG)” (Y page 156).
Program mode selector switch on SL 65 AMG
122
The current program mode appears in the
right multifunction display (Y page 119).
i SL 63 AMG: In addition, the currently
selected program mode is indicated in red
on the program mode selector dial.
For information on automatic program mode
(C or S), see “Automatic shift program” (Y page 118) and “One-touch gearshifting” (Y page 120).
Activating manual shift program
X
All models except SL 63 AMG: Press the
program mode selector switch repeatedly
until M appears in the right multifunction
display.
X
SL 63 AMG: Turn the program mode selector dial until M appears in the right multifunction display.
The automatic transmission switches to
manual program mode M. Automatic shift-
i Manual program mode M will not be
stored. When the engine is turned off with
manual program mode M selected, the
automatic transmission will go to automatic program mode (C or S) when the
engine is restarted.
Upshifting
! In manual program mode M, the auto-
matic transmission will not upshift, even if
the engine has reached its overrevving
range. Shift up into the next gear before the
engine has reached its overrevving range.
Make absolutely certain that the engine
speed does not reach the red marking on
the tachometer. Otherwise the engine
could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
X
Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
right in the D+ direction.
X
or
X
Briefly pull right gearshift control 2
(Y page 120).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
next higher gear.
Upshift indicator
Downshifting
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
X
1 Current gear
2 Upshift indicator
In manual program mode M, upshift indicator
2 in the right multifunction display advises
you to upshift before the engine reaches the
overspeed range. In addition, symbol ^ may
appear instead of manual program mode
symbol M in the right multifunction display.
Thus you can drive at the maximum engine
speed for each gear without overrevving the
engine.
Shift the automatic transmission from current gear 1 into the next higher gear.
The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving.
i When you brake or stop, the automatic
transmission shifts down into a gear from
which you can easily accelerate or take off.
Kickdown
Using the kickdown when driving in manual
program mode M is not possible.
Deactivating manual shift program
X
All models except SL 63 AMG: Press the
program mode selector switch repeatedly
until C or S appears in the right multifunction display.
X
SL 63 AMG: Turn the program mode selector dial until C or S appears in the right
multifunction display.
Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
left in the D- direction.
or
X
the optimal gear for maximum acceleration.
Briefly pull left gearshift control 1
(Y page 120).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
next lower gear.
i For maximum acceleration, press and
hold the gear selector lever to the left in the
D- direction or pull and hold the left gearshift control. Depending on the engine
speed the automatic transmission selects
or
X
Restart the engine.
The automatic transmission will go to automatic program mode (C or S).
Manual program mode M is not stored.
Z
123
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Emergency operation (limp-home
mode)
If vehicle acceleration becomes less responsive or sluggish or the automatic transmission
no longer shifts, the automatic transmission
is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only
second gear and reverse gear R can be
selected.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
X
Restart the engine.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
R.
X
Have the automatic transmission checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.
Instrument cluster
Introduction
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster” (Y page 30).
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
1 Reset button
Activating the instrument cluster
The instrument cluster is activated when you
Ropen
a door
Rswitch
Rpress
on the ignition
reset button 1
Rswitch
on the exterior lamps (Y page 99)
i Opening a door activates the instrument
cluster illumination only for about 30 seconds.
For information on changing the instrument
cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
(Y page 136).
124
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Adjusting the instrument cluster illumination
Use reset button 1 to adjust the illumination
brightness for the instrument cluster and the
switches on the center console..
i The instrument cluster illumination is dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
ambient light conditions.
X
X
To brighten illumination: Turn reset button 1 clockwise until the desired level of
illumination is reached.
To dim illumination: Turn reset button
1 counterclockwise until the desired level
of illumination is reached.
Coolant temperature gauge
The coolant temperature gauge is on the left
side in the instrument cluster (Y page 30).
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near the
vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stopand-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display and the
red coolant temperature warning lamp
D in the instrument cluster comes on.
The engine should not be operated with a
coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Resetting trip odometer
X
Make sure you are viewing the standard
display (Y page 129) in the multifunction
display.
X
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (Y page 124) until the
trip odometer is reset.
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer
(Y page 30) denotes excessive engine speed.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur just
Z
125
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
Introduction
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 87).
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display,
and much more.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by
the driver when traffic and road conditions
permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
5
6
Function only available in telephone menu.
AMG vehicles only.
126
The control system relays information to the
multifunction display.
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display and
the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel.
1 Left multifunction display in the
speedometer
2 Right multifunction display in the
tachometer
3 Press button
s to take a call
to dial5
to redial5
t to end a call
to reject an incoming call
Press button
æ to select submenus in the Setç tings menu
to set values
to operate the RACETIMER6
to set the volume
4 Press button
è to select next or previous menu
ÿ
Controls in detail
Control system
Press button briefly
j to move within a menu
k Within Audio/DVD menu to
select previous or next track,
scene or stored station.
Within Telephone menu to
switch to the phone book and
select a name or number.
Press and hold button
j Within Audio/DVD menu to
k select previous or next track
with quick search or to select
previous or next station in station list or wave band.
Within Telephone menu to
start the quick search in the
phone book.
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what appears in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction
display is arranged in menus and accompanying functions and submenus.
The individual functions are then found within
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly to
pass through each menu one after the
other.
X
Multifunction display
The multifunction display consists of the display fields in the speedometer and the tachometer. In its default state, the left multifunction display shows the main odometer and the
outside temperature, while the trip odometer
appears in the right multifunction display.
This default setting is referred to as the standard display.
Press button k or j repeatedly to
pass through each function display, one
after the other, in the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions on
using these submenus, see “Settings
menu” (Y page 135).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.
1 Outside temperature indicator
2 Transmission position/gear range indica-
tor
3 Trip odometer
4 Automatic transmission program mode
indicator
5 Main odometer
For more information on menus displayed in
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
submenus” (Y page 127).
Z
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus and submenus
128
Controls in detail
Control system
i The headings used in the menus table are
designed to facilitate navigation within the
system and are not necessarily identical to
those shown in the multifunction display.
The first function displayed in each menu
will automatically show you which part of
the system you are in.
Function
1
Standard display menu
(Y page 129)
2
AMG7 menu (Y page 130)
3
Audio/DVD menu (Y page 132)
4
Navigation menu (Y page 134)
5
Distronic menu (Y page 134)
6
Vehicle status message memory8
menu (Y page 134)
7
Settings menu (Y page 135)
Function
8
Trip computer menu (Y page 141)
9
Telephone menu (Y page 142)
The following functions are available:
Standard display menu
8
RChecking
tire inflation pressure
(Y page 217)
RCalling
up digital speedometer or outside
temperature (Y page 129)
RCalling
up maintenance service indicator
(Y page 242)
RChecking
Standard display
1 Outside temperature
2 Transmission position
3 Trip odometer
4 Automatic transmission program mode
5 Main odometer
X
7
You can select whether the digital speedometer or the outside temperature appears in
the left multifunction display (Y page 137).
X Press button j or k to select the
functions in the Standard display menu.
If you see another display, press button
è or ÿ repeatedly until the standard
display appears.
engine oil level (Y page 205)
Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature
If you have selected the digital speedometer
for the standard display (Y page 137), select
the outside temperature display here.
G Warning!
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Z
AMG vehicles only.
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
129
Controls in detail
Control system
SETUP
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may still
be icy, especially in wooded areas or on
bridges.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the digital speedometer or, depending on
the chosen setting, the outside temperature appears in the right multifunction display.
AMG menu
This function is only available in AMG vehicles.
The main screen of the AMG menu shows you
the gear currently engaged as well as the
engine oil temperature.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
1 Engine oil temperature indicator
2 Gear indicator
The engine oil temperature flashes if the
engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80†. During this time, avoid driving at full
engine speed.
If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next
to gear indicator 2 as a reminder to upshift.
Use buttons j or k to select the following functions in the AMG menu:
RSETUP (Y
page 130)
RRACETIMER (Y
ROverall
RLap
page 130)
analysis (Y page 132)
analysis (Y page 132)
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button j repeatedly until the
SETUP appears in the multifunction display.
or
X
Press AMG button on the center console
(SL 63 AMG only) (Y page 159).
1 Automatic transmission program mode
indicator
2 Suspension style indicator
RACETIMER
G Warning!
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads
130
Controls in detail
Control system
is prohibited under all circumstances and
the driver is and must always remain
responsible for following posted speed limits.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and save
driving stretches.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button j repeatedly until the
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction
display.
1 Lap number
2 RACETIMER
3 Gear indicator
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (Y page 87).
While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you
cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons
æ or ç.
X
Starting: Press button æ.
X
Displaying intermediate time: Press button ç while the timer is running.
The intermediate time is shown for 5 seconds.
X
Stopping: Press button æ.
When you stop the vehicle and turn the
SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 87) or, in
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off the
engine and do not open the driver’s door, the
RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
when you switch the ignition back on or
restart the engine and then press the æ
button.
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
You can save up to nine laps.
X Press button ç while the timer is running.
The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
X
Press button ç within 5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be saved
as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.
The new lap begins to be timed as soon as
the intermediate time is called up.
1 Best lap time
2 Lap number
3 RACETIMER
4 Gear indicator
Resetting current lap
X Press button æ while the timer is running.
The timer stops.
X
Press button ç.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
Deleting all laps
It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
When you turn off the engine, the RACETIMER
will be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All laps
are deleted.
131
Z
Controls in detail
Control system
X
Press button æ while the timer is running.
The timer stops.
X
Press the reset button in the instrument
cluster twice (Y page 30).
X
Press button æ.
The timer starts. The saved laps are
deleted.
Overall analysis
This function is only available if you have
saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button j repeatedly until the
overall analysis appears in the multifunction display.
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
132
2 Overall driving time
3 Maximum speed
3 Maximum speed during lap
4 Average speed during lap
4 Average speed
5 Overall distance driven
5 Lap length
Lap analysis
This function is only available if you have
saved at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the AMG menu appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button j repeatedly until the lap
analysis appears in the multifunction display.
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol
1.
X
Press button j or k to see other lap
analyses.
Audio/DVD menu
The functions in the Audio/DVD menu operate the audio or video equipment which you
currently have turned on.
If no audio equipment is currently turned on,
the message AUDIO Off appears in the multifunction display.
The following functions are available:
RSelecting
ROperating
audio devices/audio media
(Y page 133)
ROperating
1 Lap number
2 Lap time
radio station (Y page 133)
video DVD (Y page 133)
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting radio station
X
Turn on the COMAND system and select
radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the currently tuned station appears in the
multifunction display.
Example illustration
1 Wave band setting and stored memory
position
2 Station frequency
X
Select next or previous stored station:
Press k or j briefly to select a
stored station.
X
Select next or previous station in the
station list: Press and hold k or j
to select a station.
X
Select next or previous station in wave
band (Only if no station list is available):
Press and hold k or j to select a
station.
You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating instructions.
Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to satellite radio service
provider are required for satellite radio operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for details and availability for your
vehicle.
For more information, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
Operating audio devices/audio media
X
X
Turn on the COMAND system and select
the audio device or audio media. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
Audio/DVD menu appears in the multifunction display.
Example illustration
1 Disc number
2 Current track
X
Selecting previous or next track: Press
button k or j briefly.
X
Selecting a track from the track list
(quick search): Press and hold button
k or j.
The current track does not appear during
Audio AUX mode operation.
Operating video DVD
X
Turn on the COMAND system and select
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
system operating instructions.
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
Audio/DVD menu appears in the multifunction display.
Z
133
Controls in detail
Control system
name of the street currently traveled on
appear in the multifunction display.
RWith
the COMAND system switched on
and route guidance activated, the direction of travel and maneuver instructions
appear in the multifunction display.
1 Disc number
2 Current scene
X
Press button k or j to select a
scene.
Navigation menu
The Navigation menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Navigation menu appears in the multifunction display.
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the navigation system:
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAVI Off appears in the
multifunction display.
RWith
the COMAND system switched on
but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the
134
Please refer to the COMAND system operating instructions for instructions on how to
activate the route guidance system.
Distronic menu
Use the Distronic menu to display the current settings for your Distronic system. The
information shown in the multifunction display depends on whether the Distronic system is activated or deactivated.
Please refer to the “Driving systems” section
of this manual (Y page 147) for instructions
on how to activate Distronic.
Vehicle status message memory
menu
Use the Vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the memory.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu
only appears, if messages have been stored.
G Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are
only indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply
a reminder with respect to the operation of
certain systems. They do not replace the
owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to
maintain the vehicle’s operating safety.
Have all required maintenance and safety
checks performed on the vehicle. Bring the
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center to address the malfunction and
warning messages.
Controls in detail
Control system
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Vehicle status message memory
menu appears in the multifunction display.
If conditions have occurred causing status
messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the right multifunction display:
when the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 0 or removed from the
starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO the number
of messages will reappear when you turn off
the engine by pressing the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button and open the driver’s door.
Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
status message memory will be cleared when
you turn off the ignition.
Settings menu
Introduction
1 Number of recorded status messages
X
Press button j or k.
The stored messages will now be displayed
in the order in which they have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages,
see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display” (Y page 255).
i After you have scrolled through all
recorded status messages, the first
recorded message appears again.
Should the vehicle’s system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages
will reappear in the multifunction display
In the Settings menu there are two functions: The function To reset, press reset
button for 3 seconds, with which you can
reset all the settings to the original factory
settings and a collection of submenus with
which you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
The following settings and submenus are
available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings (Y page 135)
RSubmenus
in the Settings menu
(Y page 136)
RInstrument
cluster submenu (Y page 136)
RLighting
RVehicle
submenu (Y page 138)
submenu (Y page 140)
RConvenience
submenu (Y page 140)
Resetting to factory settings
You can reset the functions of all submenus
to the factory settings.
For safety reasons, the function Light Circuit Headlamp Mode in the Lighting submenu cannot be reset while driving.
X Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press the reset button in the instrument
cluster for approximately 3 seconds.
The request to press the reset button once
more to confirm appears in the right multifunction display.
135
Z
Controls in detail
Control system
Press the reset button once more.
The functions of all the submenus will be
reset to factory settings.
X
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
Lighting submenu
RSetting daytime running lamp mode (USA
only) (Y page 138)
The settings you have changed will not be
reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button a second time.
X
Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
with button æ.
RSetting
X
With the selection marker on the desired
submenu, use button j to access the
individual functions within that submenu.
RSetting
Once within the submenu, use button
j to move to the next function or button
k to move to the previous function
within that submenu.
Vehicle submenu
RSetting automatic locking (Y page 140)
X
Submenus in the Settings menu
X
X
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
the Settings menu appears in the multifunction display.
Press button j.
The collection of the submenus appears in
the right multifunction display. There are
more submenus than can be simultaneously displayed.
X
X
Use button æ or ç to change the
settings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can be
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can
be found on the following pages.
Instrument cluster submenu
RSelecting speedometer display mode
(Y page 137)
136
RSelecting
language (Y page 137)
RSelecting
standard display (Y page 137)
locator lighting (Y page 138)
RSetting
night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
(Y page 139)
interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 140)
Convenience submenu
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 140)
Instrument cluster submenu
Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. Cluster submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings.
Controls in detail
Control system
The following functions are available:
RSelecting
speedometer display mode
(Y page 137)
RSelecting
RSetting
language (Y page 137)
standard display (Y page 137)
Selecting language
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Instr. Cluster submenu.
Setting standard display
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Instr. Cluster submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Language appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Select Display appears in
the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
X
Press button æ or ç to select the
language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
X
Press button æ or ç to select the
desired setting.
The selected display appears in the left
multifunction display.
The other display now appears in the right
multifunction display when scrolling
through the Standard display menu
(Y page 129).
Selecting speedometer display mode
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Instr. Cluster submenu.
X
X
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Digital Speedometer
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
Press button æ or ç to set speedometer unit to Kilometers or Miles.
Z
137
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu
The following message appears in the multifunction display:
Lighting Cannot be fully reset to
factory settings while driving.
Access the Lighting submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu to
change the lamp and lighting settings on your
vehicle.
The following functions are available:
RSetting
daytime running lamp mode (USA
only) (Y page 138)
RSetting
locator lighting (Y page 138)
RSetting
night security illumination
(Y page 139)
RSetting
interior lighting delayed shut-off
(Y page 140)
Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA
only)
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Light Circuit Headlamp
Mode appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
138
X
Press button æ or ç to select manual operation (Manual) or daytime running
lamp mode (Constant).
With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in position
M or U, the low-beam headlamps are
switched on when the engine is running.
In low ambient light conditions the following
lamps will come on additionally:
RParking
RTail
lamps
lamps
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
For more information on the daytime running
lamp mode, see “Lighting” (Y page 100).
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
of all submenus to the factory settings while
driving (Y page 135) will not deactivate the
daytime running lamp mode.
Setting locator lighting
With the locator lighting feature activated and
the exterior lamp switch in position U, the
following lamps will come on during darkness
when the vehicle is unlocked using button
k on the SmartKey:
RParking lamps
RTail
lamps
RLicense
RSide
plate lamps
marker lamps
RFront
fog lamps
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
lamps will go out automatically after approximately 40 seconds.
Controls in detail
Control system
X
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Locator Lighting appears
in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
activated and the exterior lamp switch in position U before the engine is turned off, the
following lamps will come on when the engine
is turned off:
RParking
RTail
lamps
RLicense
RSide
Press button æ or ç to switch the
locator lighting function On or Off.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
U when exiting the vehicle.
The locator lighting feature is activated.
Setting night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature)
Use this function to set whether you would
like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and closing all doors.
plate lamps
fog lamps
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
open a door or do not close an opened door,
the lamps will automatically go out after
60 seconds.
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
X
Press button æ or ç to switch the
headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or
Off.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
U before turning off the engine.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
activated.
marker lamps
RFront
X
lamps
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Headlamps Delayed
Switch-off appears in the multifunction
display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
You can temporarily deactivate the headlamps delayed shut-off feature:
X
Before exiting the vehicle, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.
X
Then turn it to position 2 and back to position 0.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as
you start the engine.
Z
139
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
Use this function to set whether you would
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Lighting submenu.
X
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Interior Lighting
Delayed Switch-off appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu to
set the automatic locking.
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience submenu to activate the easy-entry/exit feature.
Setting automatic locking
Use this function to activate or deactivate the
automatic central locking. With the automatic
central locking system activated, the vehicle
is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
X Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Vehicle submenu.
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 95).
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Automatic Door Lock
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
X
Press button æ or ç to switch the
automatic central locking On or Off.
Press button æ or ç to switch the
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
On or Off.
140
G Warning!
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, move
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press
one of the memory position buttons or
memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could open the driver’s door
and unintentionally activate the easyentry/exit feature, which could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Control system
X
X
Move the selection marker with button
æ or ç to the Convenience submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Easy-entry Function
appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current setting.
Trip computer menu
Use the Trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle.
The following information is available:
RFuel
consumption statistics since start
(Y page 141)
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 141)
RResetting
fuel consumption statistics
(Y page 142)
RDistance
to empty (Y page 142)
The last function called up will reappear the
next time you enter the trip computer menu.
X
Press button æ or ç to switch the
easy-entry feature On or Off.
Fuel consumption statistics since start
X
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computer
menu appears in the multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
left multifunction display.
1 Distance driven since start
2 Average speed since start
3 Time elapsed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time
period.
Fuel consumption statistics since last
reset
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computer
menu appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message From Reset appears in the
left multifunction display.
141
Z
Controls in detail
Control system
Distance to empty
Telephone menu
X
G Warning!
X
1 Distance driven since last reset
2 Average speed since last reset
3 Time elapsed since last reset
4 Average fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
X
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computer
menu appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the reading that you want to reset appears
in the multifunction display.
X
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster until the respective values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
142
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly until
the first function of the Trip computer
menu appears in the multifunction display.
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the message Range: appears in the left
multifunction display.
The calculated remaining driving range
based on the current fuel tank level
appears in the right multifunction display.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
vehicle at the fuel pump ¿ is shown
instead of the range.
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking
a telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e.
without being connected to an external
antenna) from inside the vehicle while the
engine is running. Doing so could lead to a
malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/
or personal injury.
Controls in detail
Control system
You can connect your telephone via Bluetooth® to the COMAND system, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
X Switch on the COMAND system.
See separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
X
Press button ÿ or è on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
message TEL appears in the left multifunction display.
One of the following messages will appear
in the multifunction display:
RNo Service: No network is available.
RBluetooth
Ready: The telephone has
not been connected to the COMAND system via Bluetooth® yet.
X Connect the telephone to the
COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
RReady
or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you can answer a call at any time. In the right
multifunction display you will then see the
message, or if available, the caller ID (number
and name):
X
Press button s.
You have answered the call.
message TEL appears in the left multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the desired name appears in the right multifunction display.
If you press and hold button j or
k for longer than 1 second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
X
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
If the connection is successful and this feature is supported by your network provider,
the name of the party (if stored in your
phone book) you are calling will appear in
the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
call
X
Press button t.
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you
may select and dial a number from the phone
book. You can add new numbers to the phone
book with the telephone, see separate operating instructions.
X Press button ÿ or è on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
or
X
Press button t if you do not want to
make the call.
Z
143
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving systems
Introduction
This section describes the following driving
systems of your vehicle:
RCruise
control and Distronic
RDistance
Redialing
The control system stores the most recently
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
need to search through your entire phone
book.
X Press button ÿ or è on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
message TEL appears in the left multifunction display.
X
Press button s.
The first number in the redial memory
appears in the right multifunction display.
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
the desired number or name appears in the
multifunction display.
X
Press button s.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
144
warning function is only available
with Distronic
RActive
Body Control (ABC)
RParktronic
RHill
system
start assist system (SL 63 AMG)
RRACE
START (SL 63 AMG)
The ABS, BAS, ESP® and the electro-hydraulic
brake system are described in the “Safety and
security” section (Y page 63).
Cruise control
The cruise control automatically maintains
the speed you set for your vehicle.
The use of the cruise control is recommended
for driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
The currently set speed or last set speed
(“Resume” function) appears in the status
indicator of the multifunction display:
RUSA
only: e.g. CC 55 MPH
RCanada
only: e.g. Ñ 90 Km/h
G Warning!
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be dan-
gerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
in tire traction can result in wheel spin
and loss of control.
RDeactivate
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral position N
the cruise control when driv-
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
ing in fog.
due to a malfunction
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
G Warning!
The cruise control brakes automatically so
that the set speed is not exceeded.
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a
convenience system designed to assist the
driver during vehicle operation. The driver
is and must always remain responsible for
the vehicle’s speed and for safe brake operation.
The vehicle speed displayed in the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
for the cruise control system.
1 Setting current or higher speed
2 Setting current or lower speed
Setting current speed
X
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of
arrow 2.
Activating cruise control
X
You can activate the cruise control at vehicle
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h).
You cannot activate the cruise control:
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
3 Canceling the cruise control
4 Activating the cruise control or resuming
to last set speed
Rwhen
you brake
Rwhen
you have engaged the parking brake
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission will automatically downshift.
145
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Canceling cruise control
X
Depress the brake pedal.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last set speed.
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3.
The last set speed is stored for later use.
Changing the set speed
or
X
The last stored set speed is canceled when
the engine is turned off.
The cruise control switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake.
The cruise control also switches off automatically when
Rthe
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Rthe
ESP® is in operation.
ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch.
Rthe
ESP® has switched off due to a malfunction.
Rthe
Ryou
shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving.
An acoustic warning will sound. Observe additional messages in the multifunction display
that may appear.
146
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments.
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed
to a value that the prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and unexpected acceleration
or deceleration of the vehicle could cause
an accident and/or serious injury to you
and others.
When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
X Lift the cruise control lever in direction of
arrow 1 and hold it up to increase, or
depress the cruise control lever in direction
of arrow 2 and hold it down to decrease,
until the desired speed is reached.
X
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
1 km/h) increments
X Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 to increase or in direction
of arrow 2 to decrease.
Resume last stored speed
G Warning!
The set speed stored in memory should
only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
X
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4.
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last stored set speed is canceled when
the engine is turned off.
Distronic
Safety notes
When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise
control increases the driving convenience
afforded by the cruise control while traveling
on expressways and other major roadways.
RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your
vehicle speed will be reduced so that you
follow that vehicle at your preset following
distance.
RIf
there is no vehicle directly ahead of you,
the Distronic will function in the same way
as standard cruise control (Y page 144).
G Warning!
The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
speed adjustment reduction capability is
intended to make cruise control more
effective and usable when traffic speeds
vary. It is not however, intended to, nor
does it, replace the need for extreme care.
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
importantly, brake operation to ensure a
safe stopping distance, always remains
with the driver.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the Distronic. This could
result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
G Warning!
The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not
a substitute for active driving involvement.
It does not react to pedestrians or on stationary objects, nor does it recognize or
predict the lane curvature or the movement
of preceding vehicles.
The Distronic can only apply 20% of the
maximum braking power of the vehicle.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
provide the steering, braking and other driving inputs necessary to remain in control of
the vehicle.
High-frequency sources such as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc. can
cause the Distronic system to malfunction.
G Warning!
The Distronic requires familiarity with its
operational characteristics. We strongly
recommend that you review the following
information carefully before operating the
system.
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take road and traffic
conditions into account. Only use the Distronic if the road, weather and traffic conditions make it advisable to travel at a
constant speed.
G Warning!
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of
control.
The Distronic does not function in adverse
sight and distance conditions. Do not use
147
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
the Distronic during conditions of fog,
heavy rain, snow or sleet.
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
G Warning!
G Warning!
The Distronic cannot take weather conditions into account. Switch off the Distronic
or do not switch it on if:
Rroads
are slippery or covered with snow
or ice. The wheels could lose traction
while braking or accelerating, and the
vehicle could skid.
Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty
or visibility is diminished due to snow,
rain or fog, for example. The distance
control system functionality could be
impaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while the Distronic is
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be
able to recognize dangerous situations until
it is too late. This could cause an accident
in which you and/or others could be
injured.
G Warning!
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
148
Close attention to road and traffic conditions is imperative at all times, regardless
of whether or not the Distronic is activated.
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
The Distronic will not react to stationary
objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
The Distronic will also not respond to
oncoming vehicles.
Switch off the Distronic:
Rwhen
changing from the left to the right
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
in the left lane
Rwhen
entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp
Rin
complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
In these situations, the Distronic will continue to maintain the set speed unless
deactivated.
The Distronic is designed and intended only
to maintain a set speed and keep a set distance from moving objects in front of it.
i USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC
as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any nonapproved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Removal, tampering, or altering of the
device will void any warranties, and is not
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Distronic displays in the speedometer
If the Distronic is activated, the set speed
2 and distance warning lamp 1 appear in
the speedometer.
The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
on the Distronic system.
If the Distronic detects a vehicle directly
ahead, the Distronic indicator lamp E in
the speedometer dial comes on white.
If the Distronic calculates that there is a danger of collision, the distance warning lamp
E in the speedometer comes on red and
an intermittent warning sounds.
X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a
collision.
Under no circumstances should the driver
await the intermittent warning sound
before braking.
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
the red distance warning lamp E goes
out when the necessary distance to the
vehicle ahead is established again.
G Warning!
1 Red distance warning lamp
2 Set speed
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp (red) E in the
speedometer dial is illuminated if the Distronic system calculates that the distance
to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current speed indicate that the Distronic will
not be capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset following distance, which creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your
own braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede
with your own braking. This will result in
potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact
being avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning!
The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a
maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2
(2 m/s2). This corresponds to approximately 20% of the maximum deceleration
of your vehicle.
The Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort
to restore the preset distance or to maintain the set speed.
Z
149
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Distronic menu in the control system
3 Preset distance threshold to the preced-
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system and/or the distance warning function
are activated or deactivated.
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
i To activate or deactivate the Distronic
system, see (Y page 150) or see
(Y page 152).
To activate or deactivate the Distance
warning function, see (Y page 156).
X
ing vehicle
function (Y page 155)
Distronic activated
When the Distronic is activated, the DTR symbol and the set speed appear in the left multifunction display.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until
one of the following two displays appears
in the multifunction display.
3 Deactivating the Distronic
4 Activating the Distronic, resuming to the
last set speed or increasing speed in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Distronic deactivated
When the Distronic is deactivated, you will
see the standard display in the left multifunction display.
1 Distronic activated
2 Set vehicle speed
Cruise control lever
The Distronic system is operated by means of
the cruise control lever.
1 Preceding vehicle, if detected
2 Actual distance to the preceding vehicle
150
1 Setting current or higher speed
2 Setting current or lower speed
Activating Distronic
You can activate the Distronic when the vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h) and
110 mph (180 km/h).
When the Distronic is activated, the left multifunction display will show a message such
as DTR 55 MPH (Canada: DTR 90 Km/h).
If the Distronic is not activated after the
cruise control lever is pulled in direction of
arrow 4 (Y page 150), you will see the mes-
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the current speed
sage DTR --- MPH (Canada: DTR --- Km/h)
in the left multifunction display.
In the following cases you cannot activate the
Distronic:
Rup
to 2 minutes after starting the engine
Rwhen
you brake
Rwhen
you have engaged the parking brake
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral position N
X
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
X
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 or depress in direction of
arrow 2 (Y page 150).
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i If you do not take your foot off of the
the ESP® is switched off or has
switched off due to a malfunction
Rwhen
1 White Distronic indicator lamp E
2 Set speed
The vehicle speed displayed on the speedometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
on the Distronic system.
accelerator pedal and continue to accelerate past the set speed, the following message will appear in the multifunction
display:
DTR Override
The distance to a slower moving vehicle in
front of you will not be set. Your vehicle
speed will then be determined only by the
accelerator pedal position.
Setting a higher speed
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments.
Z
151
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Increase the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected acceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious
injury to you and others.
You can increase the set speed in two ways.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever up in
direction of arrow 1 (Y page 150).
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a
brief moment until the vehicle has reached
the set speed.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
1 km/h) increments
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (Y page 150).
Setting a lower speed
G Warning!
Keep in mind that it may take a brief
moment until the vehicle has made the necessary adjustments.
152
Decrease the set vehicle speed to a value
that the prevailing road conditions and legal
speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden and
unexpected deceleration of the vehicle
could cause an accident and/or serious
injury to you and others.
ble acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset
speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (Y page 150).
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle
sufficiently.
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments
X Briefly press the cruise control lever down
in direction of arrow 2 (Y page 150).
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a
brief moment until the vehicle has reached
the set speed.
Deactivating Distronic
Setting stored speed (Resume function)
The last stored set speed is deleted when the
engine is turned off.
The Distronic switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake.
G Warning!
The set speed stored in memory should
only be set again if prevailing road conditions and legal speed limits permit. Possi-
X
Depress the brake pedal.
or
X
Briefly push the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 3 (Y page 150).
The following message appears briefly in
the multifunction display: DTR Off
The last set speed is stored for later use.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The Distronic switches off automatically and
an acoustic warning will sound when
Setting the following distance in Distronic
Rthe
You can set the specified following distance
for Distronic by varying the time setting
between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time
setting and the current speed of your vehicle,
Distronic calculates and sets the required following distance to the preceding vehicle.
The set distance will be shown in the right
multifunction display.
vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Rthe
ESP® is in operation.
ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch.
Rthe
ESP® has switched off due to a malfunction.
Rthe
Ryou
shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving.
Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear.
G Warning!
Distronic switches off and releases the
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h)
by operation of the system. At that time the
driver must apply the brakes in order to
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to
a stop.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the Distronic. After a brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic will
resume the last set speed.
G Warning!
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion
to select the appropriate setting given road
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recommendations for safe following distance.
Example illustration (except SL 63 AMG)
1 Thumbwheel for setting distance
SL 63 AMG:
The thumbwheel for adjusting the following
distance is located on the right side of the
center console.
X Increasing distance: Turn thumbwheel
1 towards ¯.
Increasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a greater following distance to the preceding vehicle.
X
Decreasing distance: Turn thumbwheel
1 towards ®.
Decreasing the distance setting tells Distronic to maintain a shorter following distance to the preceding vehicle.
153
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Driving with Distronic
This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared
to brake in such situations. Braking will deactivate the Distronic system.
G Warning!
Distronic works to maintain the speed
selected by the driver unless a moving
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in
the same travel direction is detected (e.g.
following another vehicle ahead of you at
your set distance).
This means that:
RYour
vehicle can pass another vehicle
after you have changed lanes.
RWhile
in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your
vehicle could then accelerate to the previously selected speed.
Distronic regulates only the distance
between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra
disabled vehicle
Ran
Turns and bends
oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means
of steering or braking the vehicle.
G Warning!
Distronic should not be used in snowy or
icy road conditions.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty Distronic system sensor
cover (located in the hood grille), especially
at times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
In such a case, Distronic will switch off, and
the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Oper. Manual
appears in the multifunction display.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic system
sensor cover, see (Y page 246).
i If the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Oper. Manual dis-
154
appears during driving, the dirt (e.g. slush)
has dissolved. Distronic is available again if
you reactivate it (Y page 150).
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect a
moving vehicle in front, or it may detect one
too soon. This may cause your vehicle to
brake late or unexpectedly.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Offset driving
Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
changing lanes. There will be insufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Narrow vehicles
Distance warning function
When the Distronic is deactivated, this function will continue to warn you when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a slower vehicle
moving in your vehicle’s path and the danger
of a collision exists:
RThe
distance warning lamp E in the
speedometer comes on red.
RAn
intermittent warning will sound if necessary.
A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from
your direct line of travel may not be detected
by Distronic. There will be insufficient distance to the preceding vehicle.
Lane changing
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles
traveling near the outer edges of the lane
have not yet been detected by Distronic.
There will be insufficient distance to the preceding vehicles.
If these warnings are issued, you must brake
manually to maintain a safe distance and
avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.
When depressing the brake pedal, the warning sound ceases. The warning sound will also
cease when the distance to the preceding
vehicle is sufficient again without applying
the brakes. In this case, the distance warning
lamp E will also go out.
G Warning!
If the distance warning lamp (red) E in
the speedometer comes on while driving
and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
immediate attention on the part of the
driver is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
around a possible obstacle. However, do
155
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
not drive by relying on the distance warning
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
enable you to avoid a collision, especially
when traveling on varying road surface conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the distance warning
function. This could result in wrong or missing distance warnings.
X
Activating/deactivating: Press
switch 1.
When the distance warning function is activated, indicator lamp 2 in switch 1
comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appears
in the right multifunction display
(Y page 150).
RACE START (SL 63 AMG)
RACE START enables optimum acceleration
from a standing start with suitable high-grip
road surface conditions.
G Warning!
Example illustration (except SL 63 AMG)
1 Distance warning function on/off switch
2 Indicator lamp
SL 63 AMG:
The distance warning function on/off switch
is located on the right side of the center console.
156
RACE START is only available when the
ESP® SPORT mode is switched on. ESP®
SPORT stabilizes the vehicle only to a limited extent if the vehicle starts to skid or
when a wheel is spinning.
RACE START should be used only on closed
tracks. Always adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
Conditions for activation
RACE START can be activated when
Rthe
doors are closed
Rthe
engine is running and has reached its
operating temperature of approximately 80
†. This is the case when the engine oil
temperature indicator in the multifunction
display stops flashing.
RESP®
SPORT is switched on (Y page 67)
Rthe
multifunction steering wheel is in the
straight-ahead position
Rthe
vehicle is standing still and the brake
pedal is depressed (left foot)
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive posi-
tion D
Activating RACE START
X
Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.
X
Turn the program mode selector dial counterclockwise (Y page 118) until the RS
lamp on the dial comes on.
The message RACE START Cancel: Paddle DOWN appears in left multifunction display and the message RACE START Con-
Controls in detail
Driving systems
firm: Paddle UP appears in the right
multifunction display.
X
To cancel: Pull left steering wheel gearshift
control (Y page 120).
i If RACE START is used repeatedly in a
or
X
X
X
RACE START deactivates at a vehicle speed
of approximately 50 km/h. The automatic
transmission switches to program mode S+.
ESP® SPORT remains switched on.
To confirm: Pull right steering wheel gearshift control (Y page 120).
The message RACE START appears in left
multifunction display and the message
Available Depress Gas Pedal appears
in the right multifunction display.
Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
The engine speed rises to approximately
4000 rpm.
The message RACE START appears in left
multifunction display and the message
Release Brake To Start appears in the
right multifunction display.
Take your foot off the brake pedal while
keeping the accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceleration.
The message RACE START appears in left
multifunction display and the message
Active appears in the right multifunction
display.
short period of time, it is only available
again after having driven the vehicle a certain distance.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D or reverse gear R.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
The hill start assist system is inactive
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
grades
Hill start assist system
G Warning!
The hill start assist system is not designed
to function as a parking brake and does not
prevent the vehicle from moving when
parked on an incline.
Always engage the parking brake in addition to shifting the automatic transmission
into park position P.
On uphill grades with a gradient angle of more
than 5°, the hill start assist system maintains
the pressure in the brake system for approximately 1 second after you have released the
brake pedal. Therefore, you can start off
smoothly without the vehicle moving immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
Rwith
the automatic transmission in neutral
position N
Rwith
the parking brake engaged
the ESP® has switched off due to a malfunction
Rif
Active Body Control (ABC)
The ABC system is an active, computer-controlled system that hydraulically adjusts the
suspension at all four wheels in response to
various driving situations. It automatically
selects the optimum suspension tuning and
ride height for your vehicle.
Z
157
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Vehicle level control
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when lowering the vehicle chassis.
Your vehicle adjusts its ride height automatically to increase vehicle safety and to reduce
fuel consumption.
The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
lowered according to the selected level setting and to the vehicle speed. With increasing
speed, the ride height is reduced by up to
approximately 0.5 in (12 mm). With decreasing speed, the ride height is again raised to
the selected vehicle level.
These height adjustments are so small that
you may not notice any change.
The following vehicle level settings can be
selected when the vehicle is stationary:
Level
Use for
Indicator
lamps
Normal For driving on nor- Both lamps
mal roads.
off
Level 1
Level 2
For driving on
rough roads or
with snow chains
(Y page 234).
One lamp
on
For driving on very Both lamps
rough road surface on
conditions.
Select the level 1 and level 2 settings only
when required by current driving conditions.
Otherwise the fuel consumption may
increase and/or the handling may be
impaired.
i The selected vehicle level setting remains
stored in memory, even when the engine is
turned off and restarted.
158
1 Indicator lamp
2 Indicator lamp
3 Vehicle level control button
X
Start the engine.
X
Press button 3 briefly to change from one
level setting to the next.
RThe normal level is selected if both indicator lamps are off.
RAt
level 1, indicator lamp 1 is on.
RAt
level 2, both indicator lamps 1 and
2 are on.
When the vehicle is at level 2, pressing button 3 will return the vehicle to normal
level.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i Pressing button 3 twice in quick succession will cause the vehicle to immediately
raise or lower to the new vehicle level as
selected.
Setting suspension tuning (except SL 63
AMG)
Setting suspension tuning SL 63 AMG
The suspension tuning is set according to:
driving style
Rroad
surface conditions
Rthe
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
SL 65 AMG: You can display the current settings in the AMG SETUP menu
(Y page 130).
Suspension tuning
Ryour
X
vehicle loading
Ryour
choice of suspension style
You can set the following suspension styles:
RRegular
(Comfort)
RSporty
i The selected setting is stored, even when
the engine is turned off.
1 ABC suspension tuning button
2 Indicator lamp
X
Start the engine.
Suspension for sporty driving style
The setting for sporty driving is selected when
the indicator lamp 2 is on.
1 ABC suspension tuning button
2 AMG button
X
X
Press button 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Suspension for regular driving style
The setting for regular driving is selected
when the indicator lamp 2 is off.
Start the engine.
Suspension for sporty driving style
The suspension tuning for a sporty driving
style is selected when button 1 comes on in
red.
X Press button 1.
Button 1 comes on in red.
159
Z
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Suspension for regular driving style
The suspension tuning for a regular driving
style is selected when button 1 is not on in
red.
X Press button 1.
The red illumination on button 1 goes out.
When you have selected the suspension tuning and the program mode (Y page 118), you
can store, call up, and display the settings
using AMG button 2 when the engine is running. Pressing AMG button 2 when the ignition is switched on, displays the current
settings only.
You can also call up the settings via the control system (Y page 130)
X Storing: Press and hold AMG button 2
until an acoustic signal sounds.
The current setting is stored and appears
in the multifunction display.
X
Calling up and displaying: Press AMG
button 2.
The stores suspension tuning and program
mode are in effect and the settings appear
in the multifunction display.
160
X
Displaying: Tap AMG button 2.
The stored and/or currently active settings
appear in the multifunction display.
Parktronic system (Parking assist)
The Parktronic system is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed to
assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It
visually and audibly indicates the relative distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system is automatically activated when you switch on the ignition, release
the parking brake, and the automatic transmission is in drive position D, reverse gear
R, or neutral position N.
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
over approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At
lower speeds the Parktronic system turns on
again.
The Parktronic system also deactivates when
you shift the automatic transmission into
park position P or engage the parking brake.
The Parktronic system monitors the surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors in
the front bumper and four sensors in the rear
bumper.
1 Sensors in the front bumper
To function properly, the sensors must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the sensors
regularly, being careful not to scratch or damage the sensors, see “Cleaning the Parktronic
system sensors” (Y page 247).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It
is not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
during parking and other critical maneuvers
always remains with the driver.
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
! Special attention must be paid to objects
Range of the sensors
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
objects may not be detected by the system
and can damage the vehicle.
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or below
the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
Rear sensors
Center
approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners
approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center
approx. 8 in (20 cm)
Corners
approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle
in this range, all the distance warning segments illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no longer
be indicated by the Parktronic system.
! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
Warning indicators
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle.
Front sensors
Center
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners
approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Z
161
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Each warning indicator is divided into six yellow and two red distance segments for either
side of the vehicle. The Parktronic system is
ready to measure when the border around the
indicator is illuminated.
The current transmission position determines
which warning indicator will be activated.
Front area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
Rear area warning indicator
1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle
162
Current transmission position
Warning indicator
D
Front area activated
R or N
Front and rear area
activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or
more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the eighth
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound as the first red distance
segment illuminates and a constant acoustic warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
will sound for the second red distance segment. The signal is canceled when the auto-
matic transmission is shifted into park
position P or the parking brake is engaged.
RRear
area: An intermittent acoustic warning will sound when the first distance segment illuminates. This signal quickens with
each additional distance segment lit. When
the eighth distance segment illuminates,
the acoustic warning becomes a constant
signal. The signal is canceled when the
automatic transmission is shifted into drive
position D, or park position P, or the parking brake is engaged.
Switching the Parktronic system on/off
The Parktronic system is automatically
switched on when the ignition is switched on.
Controls in detail
Climate control system
X
1 Parktronic switch
2 Indicator lamp
X
Switching off Parktronic system: Press
Parktronic switch 1.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
X
Switching on Parktronic system: Press
Parktronic switch 1 again.
Parktronic system malfunction
Have the Parktronic system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
If only the red distance segments illuminate
and no acoustic warning sounds, the Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt, ice,
snow and slush) or there is an interference
from other radio or ultrasonic signals (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers).
The Parktronic system will automatically
switch off after 20 seconds and the indicator
lamp in the Parktronic switch comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.
X
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
(Y page 247).
X
Switch on the ignition.
or
X
Check the Parktronic system operation at
another location to rule out interference
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic system, if only the red distance segments illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds. The
Parktronic system will automatically switch
off after 20 seconds and the indicator lamp
2 in the Parktronic switch 1 comes on.
Z
163
Controls in detail
Climate control system
Climate control system
Control panels
Automatic climate control
164
Controls in detail
Climate control system
Function
1
Air distribution display, driver’s side
2
y Front defroster
Recommendation/Notes
i Keep this setting selected only until the windshield or (Y page 171)
the side windows are clear again.
3
, Air recirculation
i Only use this function for a short time, e.g. in a tunnel. (Y page 172)
Otherwise, the windows can fog up due to lack of fresh
air.
4
¯ Rear window defroster
i At very low temperatures, rear window defroster
operation is delayed until the vehicle interior has
warmed up.
(Y page 173)
5
Air distribution display, passenger side
6
Ñ Air distribution, passenger side
7
Temperature control, passenger side
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
8
9 AC cooling on/off
i Switch on the air conditioning. The indicator lamp in (Y page 167)
(Y page 170)
(Y page 168)
button 9 comes on.
9 Residual heat/ventilation
i With the engine turned off, it is possible to continue
to heat or ventilate the interior.
9
´ Climate control on/off
i Switch on the climate control system. The indicator
lamp in button ´ goes out.
(Y page 172)
(Y page 167)
Z
165
Controls in detail
Climate control system
Function
Recommendation/Notes
(Y page 171)
a
Q Air volume control
b
U Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode)
i Switch on the automatic mode. The indicator lamp in (Y page 168)
button U comes on.
c
Temperature control, driver’s side
d
Ñ Air distribution, driver’s side
Notes on climate control system
The climate control system is operational
whenever the engine is running. You can
operate the climate control system in either
the automatic or manual mode. The system
cools or heats the interior depending on the
selected interior temperature and the current
outside temperature.
It can only function optimally when you are
driving with the windows and the retractable
hardtop closed.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the
passenger compartment through the air distribution system.
166
i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
(Y page 168)
(Y page 170)
G Warning!
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the
interior and the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. Have a clogged filter replaced
as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 167) is deactivated.
G Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following
pages. Otherwise the windows could fog
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.
When the retractable hardtop is closed, do
not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the
air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear
window.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
interior before driving off. The climate control will then adjust the interior temperature to the set value much faster.
Controls in detail
Climate control system
Deactivating the climate control system
X
G Warning!
When the climate control is switched off,
the outside air supply and circulation are
also switched off. Only choose this setting
for a short time when the retractable hardtop is closed. Otherwise the windows could
fog up, impairing visibility and endangering
you and others.
X
Deactivating: Press button ´.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Reactivating: Press button ´ again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
or
X
or
Turn temperature controls 7 or c
(Y page 164) clockwise or counterclockwise.
The indicator lamp in button ´ goes out.
Press button U.
The indicator lamp in button U comes
on. The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically.
or
X
Press button y.
The indicator lamp in button ´ goes out.
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while the
engine is running and cools the interior air to
the temperature set by the operator. In addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies the
interior air and helps prevent window fogging.
G Warning!
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and others.
Deactivating
It is possible to deactivate the cooling function of the climate control system. The interior air will then no longer be cooled or
dehumidified.
X Press button 9.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay.
Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air conditioning.
X Press button 9 again.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134A. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
are harmful to the ozone layer.
i Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an
indication of a malfunction.
Z
167
Controls in detail
Climate control system
air flows through the center and side air
vents.
Automatic mode
Air distribution and air volume can be
adjusted automatically by the climate control
system. You can also adjust the settings for
air distribution and air volume manually.
When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidification is switched on. This function can be
switched off if necessary.
G Warning!
If you switch off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and others.
X
Activating: Press button U.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically.
X
Deactivating: Press button U.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The blower will run at speed setting 3. The
168
or
X
Press one button Ñ.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
The climate control settings for the respective side of the passenger compartment is
adjusted manually.
or
X
Turn air volume control Q clockwise or
counterclockwise.
The indicator lamp in button U goes out.
Automatic air volume is switched off and is
controlled according to the desired position. The automatic air distribution remains
switched on.
Setting the temperature
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
should raise or lower the temperature setting
in small increments, preferably starting at
72‡ (22†).
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn temperature control 7 and/or c (Y page 164)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Adjusting air vents
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature).
This may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in
the vehicle interior that are not in the immediate area of unprotected skin.
Controls in detail
Climate control system
Please comply with the following instructions
in order for the climate control to function
optimally:
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X
Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from obstruction.
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Center air vents
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
center air vents
4 Left center air vent, adjustable
X
X
Opening/closing adjustable center air
vents: Turn thumbwheel 3 upward to the
first stop or downward.
Center air vents 2 and 4 are open or
closed.
Opening/closing cockpit air vent: Turn
thumbwheel 3 upward all the way or
downward.
Cockpit air vent 1 is open or closed.
Side air vents
2 Left side air vent, adjustable
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent
X
Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel 3
upward or downward.
Ventilated glove box
The glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents, when the automatic climate control system is activated. The level of
airflow to the glove box depends on the airflow and air distribution settings. The temperature of the air is approximately the same
as that of the air flowing from the center air
vents.
! Close the glove box air vent when heating
the vehicle interior. Activate the air conditioning (cooling function) when the outside
temperature is high. Otherwise, temperature-sensitive items stored in the glove box
could be damaged.
1 Cockpit air vent, fixed
2 Right center air vent, adjustable
Example illustration driver’s side
1 Left side defroster air vent, fixed
Z
169
Controls in detail
Climate control system
openings may be very hot. When in close
proximity to the openings, you could be
seriously burned. To help avoid serious personal injuries, switch the AIRSCARF to a
lower heating level.
Adjusting air distribution
The air distribution can be adjusted separately on each side of the passenger compartment with buttons Ñ.
The symbols on the controls represent the
following functions:
Symbol
Function
{
Directs air through the
defroster air vents to the windshield and side windows
a
Directs air through the center
and side air vents
Y
Directs air to the footwells
d
Directs air through the center,
side air vents and to the footwells
[
Directs air through the
defroster air vents to the windshield, side windows and footwells
1 Thumbwheel
2 Air vent
i You should keep air vent 2 closed when
outside temperatures are low.
X
Opening the air vent: Make sure air vent
2 is unobstructed.
X
Turn thumbwheel 1 upwards.
X
Closing the air vent: Turn thumbwheel
1 downwards.
1 AIRSCARF vent
You can switch on the AIRSCARF neck-level
heating with the AIRSCARF switch
(Y page 94).
AIRSCARF vent
G Warning!
When switching on the AIRSCARF necklevel heating, the air streaming from the
170
X
Press one button Ñ until the desired
setting for the respective side of the pas-
Controls in detail
Climate control system
senger compartment appears in air distribution display 1 or 5 (Y page 164).
Rair
flows onto the windshield and the front
side windows
Rthe
Adjusting air volume
X
X
Decrease/increase: Turn air volume control a (Y page 164) clockwise or counterclockwise.
air recirculation mode is switched off
Deactivating: Press button y again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The previous settings are once again in
effect. The cooling remains switched on.
The air recirculation remains switched off.
or
Front defroster
X
You can use this setting to defrost the windshield, for example if it is iced up.
You can also defog the windshield and the
side windows.
or
i Keep this setting selected only until the
X
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
X
Activating: Press button y.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
The climate control switches to the following
functions automatically:
Rcooling
Rmost
on to dehumidify
efficient blower speed and heating
power, depending on outside temperature
Press button U.
The indicator lamp in button y goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
Turn temperature controls 7 and c
(Y page 164) clockwise or counterclockwise.
X
Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 105).
X
Press one button Ñ until the setting
a, d or Y appears in air distribution display 1 or 5 (Y page 164).
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
If the air distribution controls as well as the
air volume control are set to U and there
is a high need for cooling, MAX COOL is activated. “MAX COOL” appears in temperature
controls 7 and c (Y page 164).
This provides the fastest possible cooling of
the vehicle interior (when retractable hardtop
is closed).
or
X
Turn air volume control a (Y page 164)
clockwise or counterclockwise.
Windshield fogged on the outside
i Keep this setting selected only until the
windshield is clear again.
Z
171
Controls in detail
Climate control system
conditioning is activated, or press button
y.
X
Activating: Press button ,.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures.
The indicator lamp in button , is not lit
when the air recirculation mode is automatically switched on.
A quantity of outside air is added after
approximately 30 minutes.
Automatic climate control panel with MAX COOL
activated
Air recirculation mode
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
outside air and recirculates the air in the passenger compartment.
G Warning!
Fogged windows impair visibility, endangering you and others. If the windows begin
to fog on the inside, switching off the air
recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
172
X
Deactivating: Press button , again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Residual heat and ventilation
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.
i If you switch on the residual heat function
when outside temperatures are high, only
the ventilation will be switched on.
i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and
the selected temperature. The blower will
run at low speed regardless of the air distribution control setting.
X
Activating: Switch off the ignition.
X
Press button 9.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X
Deactivating: Press button 9.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i The manually selected air recirculation
mode is deactivated automatically:
Rafter
5 minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41‡ (5†)
Rafter
5 minutes if the air conditioning is
turned off
Rafter
30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately 41‡ (5†)
The residual heat is automatically turned off:
Rwhen
Rafter
Rif
the ignition is switched on
approximately 30 minutes
the battery voltage drops
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Rear window defroster
G Warning!
Any accumulation of snow and ice should
be removed from the rear window before
driving. Visibility could otherwise be
impaired, endangering you and others.
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery drain
to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
defroster is automatically switched off after
some time of operation depending on the outside temperature.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Switching on: Press button ¯.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
! The rear window defroster cannot be
switched on when the retractable hardtop
is open. The indicator lamp will start flashing if the hardtop is open.
RClose
the retractable hardtop.
The rear window defroster can then be
switched on.
X
! If the rear window defroster switches off
too soon and the indicator lamp starts
flashing, too many electrical consumers
are operating simultaneously and there is
insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by switching
the rear window defroster off.
As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster switches
back on automatically.
Retractable hardtop
Safety notes
For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop
can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
G Warning!
To prevent possible accidents, only drive
the vehicle with the retractable hardtop
either completely closed and locked, or
fully lowered into its storage compartment.
If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics
will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered
Rafter
approximately 7 minutes when the
ignition is switched on
Rafter
approximately 15 seconds when
the ignition is switched off
Shortly before the retractable hardtop is
lowered, a warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see K and the
message Retractable Roof Lowering.
Switching off: Press button ¯ again.
Z
173
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Properly lock the retractable hardtop
before continuing to drive. Otherwise, the
unlocked hardtop could open while the
vehicle is in motion and cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. You or others could
be injured as a result.
G Warning!
Before operating the retractable hardtop,
make sure there is no danger of anyone
being injured by the moving parts (retractable hardtop, roof frame, and trunk lid).
Hands must never be placed near the roof
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop,
shelf behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the
retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered. Serious personal injury may occur.
If potential danger exists, release the
retractable hardtop switch or button k
or j on the SmartKey. This immediately
interrupts the raising or lowering procedure. You then can operate the retractable
hardtop switch or press button k or
j on the SmartKey to raise or lower the
retractable hardtop away from the danger
zone
174
Otherwise the retractable hardtop and
trunk as well as other parts of the vehicle
could be damaged.
! Never sit or place heavy objects on the
rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to
the retractable hardtop and the rear shelf.
! Please keep in mind that weather conditions can sometimes change rapidly. Make
sure to close the retractable hardtop when
leaving the vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics could be
damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Opening and closing
With the retractable hardtop switch
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 173.
! When opening and closing the retractable
hardtop, make sure
Rthere
is sufficient clearance for the
retractable hardtop to move up and for
the trunk lid to move back
Rthe
luggage cover is installed, extended
and closed
Rthe
trunk is loaded only to the height of
the luggage cover
Rthe
luggage/cargo does not push up the
closed luggage cover
Rthe
Rthe
trunk lid is closed
outside temperature is above +5‡
(-15†)
Retractable hardtop switch
1 Opening
2 Closing
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Close the luggage cover (Y page 178).
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
X
Close the trunk lid.
X
Switch on the ignition.
Opening
With the SmartKey
before you open it. Otherwise water may
enter the trunk interior.
Pull up on the retractable hardtop switch as
indicated by arrow 1 until the retractable
hardtop is completely lowered into its trunk
storage compartment.
Closing
X Press down on the retractable hardtop
switch as indicated by arrow 2 until the
retractable hardtop is completely closed
and locked.
Press and hold button k until the
retractable hardtop is completely open.
The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
switches on and the rear side windows also
open.
X
Release button k to interrupt the opening procedure.
X
Press and hold button k once more to
open the door windows.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 173.
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry
X
X
X
Close the luggage cover (Y page 178).
X
Close the trunk lid.
X
Aim the transmitter eye at an outside door
handle.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
the outside door handle.
Closing (Convenience closing feature)
X Press and hold button j until the
retractable hardtop is completely closed.
All currently open windows also close.
X
Release button j to interrupt the closing procedure.
Opening (Summer opening feature)
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry
before you open it. Otherwise water may
enter the trunk interior.
Z
175
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Locking
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 173.
The retractable hardtop is not fully closed and
locked or not fully opened and locked if
Rthe message K Retractable
Roof In
Operation appears in the multifunction
display
warning sounds for 10 seconds when
driving off or while driving
Unlocked status noticed while driving
G Warning!
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so and lock the
retractable hardtop before continuing to
drive. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Leave the ignition switched on.
X
To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
closed position, press down on the retractable hardtop switch (Y page 174) forward
until the retractable hardtop is fully closed.
Ra
If the retractable hardtop is not properly
locked, lock it as follows.
Unlocked status noticed when stopped
X
Switch on the ignition.
or
X
To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
closed position, press down on the retractable hardtop switch (Y page 174) forward
until the retractable hardtop is fully closed.
X
or
X
To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
opened position, pull up on the retractable
hardtop switch (Y page 174) until the
retractable hardtop is fully opened.
176
To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully
opened position, pull up on the retractable
hardtop switch (Y page 174) until the
retractable hardtop is fully opened.
Wind screen
G Warning!
The wind screen can restrict the driver’s
vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent
a possible accident when visibility is limited
(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the
wind screen should be folded back.
The wind screen deflects drafts away from the
driver and passenger when the retractable
hardtop is lowered.
The wind screen is stored in the trunk.
Installing
X
Leave the wind screen folded and place it
on the roll bar.
X
Make sure the fastening straps are unbuckled.
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
1 Guide tabs
2 Buckle
1 Release button
X
X
Guide the fastening straps around the top
of the roll bar and close buckles 2.
X
Undo the buckles on the upper section of
the roll bar by pressing release button 1.
X
Tighten the fastening straps if necessary.
X
X
Lower the roll bar (Y page 59).
X
Fold the upper section of the wind screen
up towards the head restraints until it
stops.
Lower the roll bar (Y page 59).
Make sure the fastening straps do not get
caught.
X
Pull the wind screen out towards the front
of the vehicle.
Be careful not to damage interior trim with
the guide tabs.
X
Store the wind screen in a safe place.
X
Slide the wind screen into the roll bar until
guide tabs 1 on each side latch underneath the roll bar.
Make sure the fastening straps do not get
caught.
Adjust the roll bar to a height (Y page 59)
that allows you to reach easily underneath
it.
Removing
X
Fold the upper section of the wind screen
back.
X
Adjust the roll bar to a height (Y page 59)
that allows you to reach easily underneath
it.
Z
177
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
Luggage cover
Closing
Opening
The luggage cover covers luggage/cargo in
the trunk.
X
Unhook luggage cover 1 from side holders
3.
! To prevent damage to the retractable
X
While holding on to handle 4, guide luggage cover 1 in the opposite direction of
arrow.
hardtop or luggage/cargo when lowering
the retractable hardtop:
RLoad
trunk only to the height of the luggage cover.
Removing
RDo not permit luggage/cargo to push up
the closed luggage cover.
RDo not place anything on top of or in front
of the luggage cover.
RDo not place anything on the shelf behind
the roll bar.
Closed luggage cover
1 Luggage cover
2 Zipper
3 Side holder
4 Handle
X
Pull out luggage cover 1 in direction of
arrow using handle 4.
X
Hook luggage cover 1 into left and right
side holders 3.
Closed luggage cover
1 Luggage cover
2 Zipper
3 Side holder
4 Handle
X
178
Fold back the entire length of the zipper’s
cloth cover.
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop
X
Open zipper 2 completely while the luggage cover is closed.
X
Open luggage cover 1.
X
7 Luggage cover
8 Cloth end
9 Cloth holder
Closed luggage cover
5 Tensioning clasp
6 Retainer spring
X
Carefully tilt luggage cover 7 in direction
of arrow towards rear of trunk.
X
Roll up front end of cloth 8 in the trunk
towards the front and fasten it in place in
front of cloth holder 9.
X
X
Open tensioning clasps 5 by pulling them
downward.
Unhook retainer springs 6 from holders
and flip retainer springs all the way up.
1 Luggage cover
2 Hook
3 Guide rail
X
Insert luggage cover 1 into guide rails
3 on both sides using hooks 2.
X
Tilt luggage cover 1 forward in direction
of arrow.
X
Fold retainer springs of tensioning clasps
downward and clip them into holders on
both sides (Y page 179).
! Before installing the luggage cover, make
X
sure that the cloth end is in front of the
cloth holder. Otherwise, it could be damaged.
Close tensioning clasps on both sides by
pressing them upward.
X
Pull handle of luggage cover towards the
rear.
X
Clip eyelets onto side trim panels.
G Warning!
Only open the tensioning clasps when the
luggage cover is opened. You could otherwise be injured.
Carefully place luggage cover in trunk.
X
Remove luggage cover 7 from the trunk.
Installing
179
Z
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
X
Close the zipper completely.
X
X
Fold back the zipper’s cloth cover across
the entire length of the luggage cover.
Opening: Squeeze stop buttons 1 and
guide the sunshade towards the rear.
X
Closing: Using handle 2, slide the sunshade towards the front of the vehicle.
Sunshade for panorama roof
The sunshade protects you from excessive
sunlight coming in through the panorama
roof.
G Warning!
Do not operate the sunshade while driving.
Adjusting the sunshade while driving could
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Loading and storing
Parcel nets
G Warning!
The parcel net is intended for storing lightweight items only, such as road maps, mail,
etc.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in
the parcel net. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
be thrown around inside the vehicle and
cause injury to vehicle occupants.
The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
A parcel net is located in the passenger footwell.
Parcel nets in the trunk
1 Stop buttons
2 Handle
180
There are three parcel nets available in the
trunk to secure loads. A parcel net on each
side of the right and left trunk side walls and
a trunk floor net.
X Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk back
wall towards the front over the luggage.
X
Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes on
the trunk floor.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Storage compartments
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backs.
Do not place anything on shelf behind the
roll bar.
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will
help to prevent stored objects from being
thrown about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle
Ran
maneuvers
accident
Glove box
1 Glove box lid release
2 Glove box lid
1 Armrest
2 Storage compartment release button
X
Opening: Press glove box lid release 1.
i The Roadside Assistance button p
X
Closing: Push glove box lid 2 up until it
engages.
Storage compartment under armrest
Depending on vehicle equipment, a media
interface is located in the storage compartment. For information on media interface, see
separate COMAND system operating instructions.
(Y page 190) and the Information button
¡ (Y page 191) are located in the storage compartment.
X
Opening: Press release button 2 and lift
armrest 1 in direction of arrow.
X
Closing: Lower armrest 1 until it engages.
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket is located in the glove box. For information on AUX operation, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
Z
181
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
Rear storage compartments
The following storage compartments remain
locked, even when the vehicle is unlocked
with the SmartKey:
RGlove
box
RStorage
RRear
compartment
storage compartments
The separate locking status of these storage
compartments can only be canceled with the
mechanical key.
Door storage compartments
G Warning!
Keep the door storage compartments
closed while vehicle is in motion. Failure to
do so may cause the seat belt to catch at
the rear and prevent proper positioning of
the seat belt.
Driver’s side rear storage compartment
1 Release button
2 Storage compartment lid
X
Opening: Press release button 1.
Locking/unlocking the storage compartments separately
The storage compartments are centrally
locked when you lock the vehicle from the
outside.
You can also lock the storage compartments
separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the
shop for service.
$ Separately unlocking storage compart-
ments
X
Opening: Press release button 1.
% Separately locking storage compart-
ments
i If the glove box cannot be unlocked using
the SmartKey, see “Unlocking the glove
box” (Y page 308).
182
1 Release button
2 Storage compartment lid
Seat storage compartments
Storage compartments are located in the seat
base of each seat.
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
The passenger seat storage compartment
contains the first aid kit, see “First aid
kit” (Y page 252).
a braking maneuver and can increase the
risk of injury in an accident.
Never allow anyone to ride in the rear.
The luggage straps can only secure light
luggage items. Carry heavy pieces of luggage in the trunk.
The rear compartment area is not designed
or intended to accommodate occupants.
Severe personal injury or death may be the
result in an accident.
G Warning!
Driver’s seat storage compartment
1 Handle
2 Storage compartment lid
X
Opening: Pull handle 1 up.
X
Fold lid 2 forward.
Luggage compartment in the rear
G Warning!
Secure all pieces of luggage in the rear with
the luggage straps. Unsecured pieces of
luggage can otherwise cause injury during
The shelf below the rear window should not
be used to carry objects. This will avoid
such objects from being thrown about and
injuring vehicle occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver.
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
1 Strap
2 Holder
3 Latch
4 Release button
Z
183
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
X
Securing luggage: Pull strap 1 out of
holder 2.
X
Secure the luggage with the strap so that it
cannot move.
X
Insert strap 1 into latch 3.
X
Releasing strap: Press release button 4
and guide strap 1 back to holder 2.
Load assist in the trunk
To facilitate trunk loading after opening the
trunk lid, use the load assist feature to raise
the retracted hardtop from its storage position in the trunk.
G Warning!
To prevent injuries, make sure that there is
no possibility of body parts getting caught
in moving parts. If potential danger exists,
press the switch again. This will immediately stop the movement of the hardtop.
184
! Only close the trunk if the hardtop is completely lowered. Otherwise you could damage the hardtop.
If you begin to close the trunk lid before the
hardtop is completely lowered, the load
assist button will flash and a warning will
sound.
1 Retracted hardtop
2 Luggage cover
3 Load assist button
Hardtop 1 can only be raised or lowered
when luggage cover 2 is closed and the
trunk lid is completely opened.
X Raising the hardtop: Press button 3.
Hardtop 1 rises a short distance. Button
3 comes on brightly. You can now open
luggage cover 2.
X
Lowering the hardtop: Close luggage
cover 2.
X
Press button 3.
Hardtop 1 lowers. Button 3 is dimly lit.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Useful features
Sun visors
Cup holders
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
G Warning!
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause
injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Left cup holder
2 Right cup holder
X
Opening: Briefly press cup holder cover.
X
Closing: Press cup holder cover until the
cup holder engages.
1 Mounting
2 Vanity mirror cover
3 Vanity mirror lamp
4 Sun visor
5 Vanity mirror
6 Holder, e.g. for gas cards
Z
185
Controls in detail
Useful features
Glare through the windshield
Ashtray
X
G Warning!
Flip sun visor 4 down when you experience glare.
Glare through a door window
Remove ashtray insert only with vehicle
standing still.
X
Reinstalling ashtray insert: Press ashtray
insert into the frame until it snaps into
place.
X
Closing: Push down cover plate 1.
X
Close vanity mirror cover 2 (if opened).
Cigarette lighter
X
Disengage sun visor 4 from mounting
1.
X
Pivot sun visor 4 to the side.
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 60.
G Warning!
Vanity mirror
The mirror lamp only functions when the sun
visor is engaged in mounting.
X
To use vanity mirror 5, lift up vanity mirror
cover 2.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on.
186
1 Cover plate
2 Sliding knob
X
Opening: Briefly touch cover plate 1.
X
Removing ashtray insert: Secure vehicle
from movement by engaging the parking
brake.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into neutral position N.
X
Press sliding knob 2 to the right.
The ashtray insert will eject a short distance.
Never touch the heating element or sides
of the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold
the knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you
do not injure themselves or start a fire with
the hot cigarette lighter.
Controls in detail
Useful features
necting, or using plugs that do not fit properly) can damage the lighter socket. With
the socket damaged, the lighter may not
function properly any longer.
Power outlet
1 Cigarette lighter
X
Open the cover plate (Y page 186).
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automatically when hot.
X
Take out cigarette lighter 1.
X
Reinsert cigarette lighter 1 in its socket
after use.
The power outlet can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (e.g. air
pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of
15 A (180 W).
X Switch on the ignition.
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and
operational, please press the ¡ button
to perform the acquaintance call. Failure to
complete either of these steps may result
in a system that is not activated.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password in the mail. You may use this
password to access the Tele Aid section in
“Owner's Online” at mbusa.com. The “My
Tele Aid” section will give you access to
account information, remote door unlock and
more.
The Tele Aid system is available if
Rit
! The lighter socket can be used to accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories (up
to a maximum of 85 W) designed for use
with the standard “cigarette lighter” plug
type. Keep in mind, however, that connecting accessories to the lighter socket (for
example extensive connecting and discon-
Tele Aid
Power outlet in trunk
1 Power outlet
has been activated and is operational.
Activation requires a subscription for mon-
Z
187
Controls in detail
Useful features
itoring services, connection and cellular air
time.
Rvehicle
battery power is available
Rthe
relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the
information on to the Response Center.
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and
pass the information on to the Response
Center.
either of these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if this
occurs, assistance must be summoned by
other means.
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
Aid call do the following:
X
Press button æ or ç on the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Use the volume knob on your COMAND
system headunit.
The Tele Aid system
System self-test
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
of response:
The system performs a self-test after you
have switched on the ignition.
RAutomatic
RRoadside
and manual emergency
Assistance
RInformation
The Tele Aid system is operational providing
that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly
connected, not damaged, and cellular and
GPS coverage is available. The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the GPS (Global Positioning
System) satellites for vehicle location. If
188
G Warning!
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button p and/
or in the Information button ¡ do not
come on during the system self-test, or if
any of these indicators remain illuminated
constantly in red and/or the message Tele
Aid Inoperative is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-test,
a malfunction in the system has been
detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as
expected. In case of an emergency, help
will have to be summoned by other means.
have to be summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in
the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as
soon as possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically
following an accident in which the Emergency
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.
An emergency call can also be initiated manually (Y page 189).
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and the
COMAND system is muted. When the connection is established, the message Call
Connected appears in the multifunction display.
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system),
Controls in detail
Useful features
vehicle model, identification number and
color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle will
be established automatically soon after the
emergency call has been initiated. The
Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the emergency
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
Initiating an emergency call manually
i The “911” emergency call system is a
public service. Using it without due cause
is a criminal offense.
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle immediately.
G Warning!
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in
the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location),
please do not wait for voice contact after
you have pressed the emergency button.
Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a
safe location. The Response Center will
automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal
and cannot make voice contact with the
vehicle occupants.
G Warning!
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
flashing continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display for approximately
10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
1 Cover
2 SOS button
X
Briefly press on cover 1 to open.
X
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2 will
flash until the emergency call is concluded.
X
Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
X
Close cover 1 after the emergency call is
concluded.
Z
189
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button
The Roadside Assistance button p is
located in the storage compartment.
cation number, model, color and location
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
i If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button p is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection
to the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate a
Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available).
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display.
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system headunit. Spoken commands are not available.
1 Roadside Assistance button p
X
Open the telephone compartment.
X
Press and hold button p for longer than
2 seconds.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The button p will flash while the call is in
progress. The message Connecting
Call will appear in the multifunction display and the COMAND system is muted.
When the connection is established, the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
transmit data generating the vehicle identifi-
190
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
X Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your
vehicle to the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center. For services such as labor and/
or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the
Roadside Assistance manual for more information.
The following is only available in the USA:
Sign and Drive services: Services such as a
jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire
are obtainable at no charge.
X
Terminating calls: Press button t on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system
headunit.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Information button
The Information button ¡ is located in the
storage compartment.
cation number, model, color and location
(subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAV button on the COMAND system headunit. Spoken commands are not available.
1 Information button ¡
X
Open the storage compartment.
X
Press and hold button ¡ for longer than
2 seconds.
A call to the Customer Assistance Center
will be initiated. The button ¡ will flash
while the call is in progress. The message
Connecting Call will appear in the multifunction display and the COMAND system
is muted.
When the connection is established, the message Call Connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
transmit data generating the vehicle identifi-
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established.
Information regarding the operation of your
vehicle, the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.
i If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is flashing continuously and
there was no voice connection to the
Response Center established, then the Tele
Aid system could not initiate an Information
call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call
Failed appears in the multifunction display.
X
Terminating calls: Press button t on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the respective button for ending a
telephone call on the COMAND system
headunit.
Call priority
If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance call or Information call are active,
an emergency call is still possible. In this
case, the emergency call will take priority and
override all other active calls.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
calls can only be terminated by a Response
Center or Customer Assistance Center representative. All other calls can be terminated
by pressing button t on the multifunction
steering wheel or the respective button for
ending a telephone call on the COMAND system headunit.
i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND system audio is muted. The
mobile phone is no longer connected to the
191
Z
Controls in detail
Useful features
headunit. If you must use this phone, we
recommend that you use it only with the
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Destination Download to the COMAND
system
i The components and operating principles
of the COMAND system can be found in the
separate COMAND operating instructions.
Destination Download allows you access to a
database of over 10,000,000 points of interest (POIs) that can be downloaded to your
vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
destination the address can be downloaded,
or can be provided with points of interests
near your location.
The Response Center can transmit destination data to the COMAND system during the
connection with the Roadside Assistance or
Customer Assistance Center.
The transmitted data can contain address
details for a Mercedes-Benz Center or POIs.
Route guidance
A prompt appears for confirmation if route
guidance to the address is to be started.
X
Select Yes using button ( or &.
X
Press button C to confirm.
The system starts the route calculation and
subsequently the route guidance to the
defined address.
i If you select No, you can save the address
in your address book.
i The destination download feature is available if the relevant mobile phone network
is available and data connection is possible.
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and
the reserve SmartKey is not available:
X Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
You will be asked to provide your password.
X
192
Then return to your vehicle at the time
arranged with the Response Center and
pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message Connecting Call appears in
the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password
(USA only).
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.
i The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is
available.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Call Connected will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the
door unlock command.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response
Center specialist will attempt to establish
voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock
authorization was received by the
Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pulling the trunk
recessed handle again.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
X Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X
Pass this number on to the Mercedes-Benz
Response Center along with your password.
The Response Center will then attempt to
covertly contact the vehicle’s Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the
Response Center will contact the local law
enforcement and you. The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.
Garage door opener
The integrated remote control can operate up
to three separately controlled devices compatible with HomeLink® or some other systems.
See the following instructions for programming information.
i If the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds,
a call to the Response Center is initiated
automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was subscribed to
and properly activated, and that necessary
cellular service and GPS coverage are available. See “Anti-theft alarm system” (Y page 71) and “Tow-away
alarm” (Y page 72).
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
control
1
Indicator lamp
234 Signal transmitter button
5
Hand-held remote control (not part
6
of vehicle equipment)
Hand-held remote control button
G Warning!
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves
up or down. When programming a gate
operator, the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks
safety stop and reverse features as
required by U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
When programming a garage door opener,
park vehicle outside the garage.
Do not run the engine while programming
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide
(CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and possible death.
Z
193
Controls in detail
Useful features
Programming the integrated remote
control
X
Step 1: Switch on the ignition.
X
Step 2: If you have previously programmed
a signal transmitter button and wish to
retain its programming, proceed to step 3.
or
X
X
If you are programming the integrated
remote control for the first time, press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release them only when
indicator lamp 1 begins to flash after
approximately 20 seconds (do not hold the
button for longer than 30 seconds).
This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes
the memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter
to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin
directly with step 3.
Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
control 5 of the device you wish to train
approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
from the signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4) to be programmed, while keeping
indicator lamp 1 in view.
194
X
Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control button 6
and the desired signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp will
only start flashing after 20 seconds.
X
Step 5: After indicator lamp 1 changes
from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control button and the signal transmitter button.
X
Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
observe indicator lamp 1.
If indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the respective signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed
and released.
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for
approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage
door opener may be equipped with the
“rolling code” feature.
X
Step 7: To program the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling
code devices) with the rolling code feature,
follow these instructions after completing the
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of
this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
i Exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener brand. Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button
may also be referred to as “learn”or
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual.
X
Step 9: Press the “training” button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
Controls in detail
Useful features
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following two steps.
X
Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the
programmed signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4).
X
Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and
release same signal transmitter button a
second time to complete the training process.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and
release the same signal transmitter button
a third time to complete the training process.
X
Step 12: Confirm the garage door operation by pressing the programmed signal
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
X
Step 13: To program the remaining two
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission which may
not be long enough for the integrated signal
transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some
U.S. gate operators are designed to “timeout” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator
(regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4 with
the following:
X Step 4: Press and hold the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
this button until it has been successfully
trained.
X
X
While still holding down the signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), “cycle” your
hand-held remote control button 6 as follows: Press and hold button 6 for 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds, and
again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
remote control until the frequency signal
has been learned.
Upon successful training, indicator lamp
1 will flash slowly and then rapidly after
several seconds.
i Upon completion of programming the
integrated remote control, make sure you
retain the hand-held remote control that
came with the garage door opener, gate
operator or other device. You may need it
for use in other vehicles, for future programming of an integrated remote control,
or simply for continued use as a hand-held
remote control to operate the respective
device in other situations.
Reprogramming a single signal transmitter button
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these
steps:
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release
the button.
Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash after
20 seconds.
X
Without releasing the signal transmitter
button, proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Z
195
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control
Programming tips
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2, 3 or
4) to activate the remote controlled
device.
The integrated remote control transmitter
continues to send the signal as long as the
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds.
If you are having difficulty programming the
integrated remote control, here are some
helpful tips:
RCheck
the frequency of hand-held remote
control 5 (typically located on the reverse
side of the remote). The integrated remote
control is compatible with radio-frequency
devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote con-
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Simultaneously press and hold outer signal
transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until indicator lamp
1 flashes rapidly. Do not hold for longer
than 30 seconds.
The codes of all three channels are erased.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of
all three channels.
196
trol 5. This will increase the likelihood of
the hand-held remote control sending a
faster and more accurate signal to the integrated remote control.
RWhile
performing step 3, hold hand-held
remote control 5 at different lengths and
angles from the signal transmitter button
(2, 3 or 4) you are programming.
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
angle at varying distances.
RIf another hand-held remote control is avail-
able for the same device, try the programming steps again using that other handheld remote control. Make sure new
batteries are in the hand-held remote control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten
the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This may
help improve transmitting and/or receiving
signals.
i Certain types of garage door openers are
incompatible with the integrated remote
control. If you should experience further
difficulties with programming the integrated remote control, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal movement.
i To install or remove the floormat more
easily, move the driver’s seat or passenger
seat as far to the rear as possible.
1 Eyelet
2 Retainer pin
X
Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer pins
2.
X
Installing: Press floormat eyelets 1 onto
retainer pins 2.
Z
197
198
Operation
Vehicle equipment ............................
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) .......
At the gas station .............................
Engine compartment ........................
Tires and wheels ...............................
Winter driving ...................................
Driving instructions ..........................
Maintenance ......................................
Vehicle care .......................................
200
200
201
203
209
234
236
241
243
199
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle
might not be equipped with all features
described in this manual.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied
you will be with its performance later on.
RDrive your vehicle during the first
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
RDuring
RDuring
the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
(140 km/h).
RDuring
this period, avoid engine speeds
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.
RShift
gears in a timely manner.
this period, avoid heavy loads (full
throttle driving) and excessive engine
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
in each gear).
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine
or the rear differential has been replaced.
C as the preferred shift program
(Y page 118) for the first 1 000 miles
(1 500 km).
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
RSelect
RAvoid
accelerating by kickdown.
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by
shifting to a lower gear using the gear
selector lever.
gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 118)
only when driving at moderate speeds (for
hill driving).
RSelect
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the
permissible maximum.
200
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling
G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
G Warning!
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel
pump nozzle, which could cause personal
injury.
! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of diesel fuel will damage the fuel system and
engine. Damage resulting from the use of
non-approved fuels or fuel additives or
resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel
fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
! If you have accidentally filled the tank
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into the
fuel lines. The fuel system must be drained
completely. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel system
drained completely.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to
overheat and potentially start a fire.
contact gas station personnel in case
labels on the pump cannot be found.
For more information on gasoline, see “Premium unleaded gasoline” (Y page 354),
see “Fuel requirements” (Y page 354), or
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle towards the rear.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
SmartKey automatically locks/unlocks the
fuel filler flap.
i In case that the central locking system
does not release the fuel filler flap, or the
opening mechanism is clamping, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON / 86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
Z
201
Operation
At the gas station
starter switch). The driver’s door then can
be closed again.
1 Fuel filler flap
2 Fuel filler cap
3 Holder
X
Turn off the engine.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the
malfunction indicator lamp ú (USA
only) or ± (Canada only) to illuminate.
For more information, see also “Practical
hints” (Y page 302).
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door (this
puts the starter switch in position 0, same
as with the SmartKey removed from the
202
Check regularly and before a long trip
X
Opening: Push fuel filler flap 1 at the
point indicated by the arrow.
X
Turn fuel filler cap 2 counterclockwise.
For information on quantities and requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 350).
Check the following:
X
Take off fuel filler cap 2.
REngine
X
Place fuel filler cap 2 in direction of arrow
into holder 3 located on the inside of fuel
filler flap.
X
Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
X
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
X
Closing: Turn fuel filler cap 2 clockwise
until it audibly engages.
X
Close fuel filler flap 1.
RTire
oil level (Y page 204)
inflation pressure (Y page 217)
RCoolant
level (Y page 207)
RVehicle
lighting (Y page 98), (Y page 311)
RWasher system and headlamp cleaning sys-
tem (Y page 208)
fluid (Y page 237), (Y page 269) and
(Y page 293)
RBrake
Operation
Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Hood
G Warning!
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others.
Opening
G Warning!
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the
hood until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call the fire department.
G Warning!
You could be injured when the hood is open
– even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot.
To prevent burns, let the engine cool off
completely before touching any compo-
nents on the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety precautions.
G Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear
of moving parts when the hood is open and
the engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades.
G Warning!
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets,
diagnostic socket) of the ignition system
Rwith
the engine running
Rwhile
1 Hood lock release lever
X
Pull release lever 1.
The hood is unlocked.
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers
or hood, never open the hood if the wiper
arms are folded forward away from the
windshield.
starting the engine
Rwhen
the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
Z
203
Operation
Engine compartment
erwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and injure you and/or others.
2 Handle for opening the hood
X
Push handle 2 under the hood upwards.
X
Pull up on the hood and then release it.
The hood will be automatically held open at
shoulder height by gas-filled struts.
Closing
G Warning!
When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving
if the hood can no longer engage after an
accident, for example. The hood could oth-
204
X
Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).
X
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with
somewhat greater force.
For further information contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Notes on checking engine oil level
When checking the oil level
Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground
Rwith
the engine at operating temperature,
the vehicle must have been stationary for
at least 5 minutes with the engine turned
off
Rwith
Engine oil
the engine not at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary
for at least 30 minutes with the engine
turned off
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Increased oil consumption can
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
i In vehicles without an oil dipstick, the
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
On the SL 550 and SL 63 AMG, you can check
the engine oil level with the oil dipstick.
engine oil level is measured via the control
system (Y page 205).
Operation
Engine compartment
X
Open the hood (Y page 203).
i The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
i SL 63 AMG only:
X
Switch on the ignition.
The standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 129).
X
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
following message appears in the multifunction displays.
X
After about 3 seconds, the following message appears in the left multifunction display: Engine Oil Measuring Now.
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
X
1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper (max) mark
3 Lower (min) mark
X
Pull out oil dipstick 1.
X
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
X
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick
guide tube.
X
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approximately 3 seconds to obtain accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower (min) mark 3 and upper (max) mark
2 of oil dipstick 1.
If necessary, add engine oil.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants
etc.” (Y page 350).
For information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see
the “Practical hints” section (Y page 284).
Checking engine oil level with the control system
On the SL 600 and SL 65 AMG you can check
the engine oil level with the control system.
One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the right multifunction display:
i In vehicles without engine oil measuring
REngine
system, the engine oil level is measured via
the oil dipstick (Y page 204).
OK
Oil Level
RAdd
1.0 qt
to reach max.
oil level.
(Canada: 1.0 liter)
RAdd
Z
1.5 qts
205
Operation
Engine compartment
to reach max.
oil level.
(Canada: 1.5 liters)
RAdd
2.0 qts
to reach max.
oil level.
(Canada: 2.0 liters)
i If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button k or j on the
multifunction steering wheel.
X
If necessary, add engine oil.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants
etc.” (Y page 350).
Other display messages
If the ignition is not switched on, the following
message appears in the multifunction display:
Turn ignition on
to measure
engine oil level.
X Switch on the ignition.
If you see the message:
Observe
Waiting Time
206
X
If the engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before repeating check procedure.
X
If the engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before
checking oil.
If you see the message:
Engine Oil Level
Not With
Engine Running
X Turn off the engine.
X
If the engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before checking oil.
X
If the engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before
checking oil.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine at
normal operating temperature, the following
message appears in the multifunction display:
Engine Oil Level
Reduce Oil Level
X Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see
the “Practical hints” section (Y page 285).
Adding engine oil
! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance
System. For a listing of approved engine
oils and oil filters, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or visit
www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required
for the Maintenance System, or changing
of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer
than those called for by the Maintenance
System will result in engine or emission
control system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Operation
Engine compartment
X
Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.
X
Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
Active Body Control (ABC) fluid level
Regular fluid level check is not required. If you
notice fluid leaks or malfunction messages in
the multifunction display, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center check the ABC-system.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
Example illustration SL 550
1 Filler cap
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X
Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 350) and
(Y page 352).
Transmission fluid level
Example illustration SL 63 AMG
1 Filler cap
The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission.
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).
G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious
burns:
RUse
extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature indicator
indicates that the coolant is overheated.
RDo
not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is above
158‡ (70†). Allow engine to cool down
before removing cap. The coolant reser-
207
Z
Operation
Engine compartment
voir contains hot fluid and is under pressure.
RUsing
a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot
fluid and steam will be blown out under
pressure.
X
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately 1/2 counterclockwise to release any
excess pressure.
X
Continue turning the cap counterclockwise
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Rfor
cold coolant: is up to the upper mark
on the bracing rib of the coolant expansion tank (translucent)
RDo
not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
X
Add coolant as required.
X
Replace and tighten cap.
! SL 600 and SL 65 AMG: Only open the cap
on the coolant expansion tank. Never open
the cap between the two charge-air coolers. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
For more information on coolant, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 355).
1 Coolant expansion tank
208
Washer system and headlamp cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in
damage to the washer system/fluid reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
! Do not use distilled or de-ionized water in
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be damaged.
Operation
Tires and wheels
depending on ambient temperatures)
(Y page 357).
X
Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press cap
1 onto filler hole until it engages.
For more information, see “Washer system
and headlamp cleaning system” (Y page 352).
Tires and wheels
Safety notes
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for information on tested and recommended
rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning
tire service and purchase.
G Warning!
1 Cap for washer fluid reservoir
Fluid for the washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system is supplied from the washer
fluid reservoir.
During all seasons, add MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
water. Premix the washer fluid in a suitable
container.
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
of cap 1 upwards.
X
Refill the washer fluid reservoir with MB
Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water (or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze,
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on
the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged. Also, the
correct operating clearance of the wheels
and the tires may no longer be correct.
G Warning!
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth,
or if the tires have sustained damage,
replace them.
When replacing rims, only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
Z
209
Operation
Tires and wheels
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. The operating safety of the vehicle cannot be assured when such tires are
used.
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning
flashers, carefully slow down, and drive
with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or tire dealer for repairs.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
210
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Important guidelines
ROnly
use sets of tires and rims of the same
type and make.
RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
RBreak
in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
RRegularly check the tires and rims for dam-
age. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
inflation pressure loss and damage to the
tire beads.
RIf
vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required.
RDo
not allow your tires to wear down too
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
RWhen
replacing individual tires, you should
mount new tires on the front wheels first
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
around).
Tire care and maintenance
G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is worn to minimum tread depth,
or if the tires have sustained damage,
replace them.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every
other week. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (Y page 215).
Tire inspection
Every time you check the tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the
following:
Rexcessive
treadwear (Y page 211)
Rcord
or fabric showing through the tire’s
rubber
Rbumps,
bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
tread or side of the tire
Operation
Tires and wheels
Replace the tire if you find any of the above
conditions.
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
tires will age and become worn over time even
if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced
after 6 years, regardless of the remaining
tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
RDriving
RTire
style
inflation pressure
RDistance
driven
Tread depth
G Warning!
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm),
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
(3 mm).
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six places
on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1/16 in
(1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered
worn and should be replaced.
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The recommended minimum tire tread depth for winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Storing tires
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
211
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
benefit, however, you must make sure the
tires rotate in the direction specified.
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of
the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel.
sures for the original equipment tires on
your vehicle.
(2) The certification label, also found on the
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo. The certification label also tells
you about the front and rear axle weight
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
212
Tire and Loading Information
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire and Loading Information placard
Loading the vehicle
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the driver’s door
B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
that can be in the vehicle and the total
weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
It also contains information on the proper
size and recommended tire inflation pres-
Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
Loading Information placard with regards to
loading your vehicle.
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration
purposes only. Load limit data are specific
to each vehicle and may vary from data
shown in the following illustration. Refer to
Tire and Loading Information placard on
vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar
Operation
Tires and wheels
Seating capacity
Steps for determining correct load limit
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing the seating
capacity is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 212).
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
X Step 1: Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard.
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Informa1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
The Tire and Loading Information placard
showing the load limit information is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 212).
X Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
tion placard example are for illustration
purposes only. Seating capacity data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the following illustration.
Refer to Tire and Loading Information placard on vehicle for actual data specific to
your vehicle.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
The combined weight of all occupants,
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
applicable) should never exceed the weight
referenced in that statement.
1 Seating capacity information on the Tire
and Loading Information placard
213
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
X
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 215).
Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 213).
Example
Combined weight
limit of occupants and
cargo from Tire and
Loading Information
placard
Number of
occupants
(driver and
passengers)
Occupants weight
Combined
weight of all
occupants
Available cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (total load
limit from Tire and Loading Information placard minus combined
weight of all occupants)
1
1 500 lbs
1
Occupant 1: 175 lbs
175 lbs
1 500 lbs - 175 lbs = 1 325 lbs
2
1 500 lbs
2
Occupant 1: 175 lbs
Occupant 2: 195 lbs
370 lbs
1 500 lbs - 370 lbs = 1 130 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the
less cargo and luggage load capacity is available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (Y page 215).
Certification label
Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the
trailer tongue load (if applicable)
(Y page 215) as to not exceed the permissi-
214
ble load limit, you must make sure your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
You can obtain the GVWR and GAWR from the
certification label. The certification label can
be found on the driver’s door B-pillar, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 339).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load must never
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total
allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed
the maximum permissible weight limits
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer
Operation
Tires and wheels
fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Trailer tongue load
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
The tongue load of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the load
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and
everything loaded in it.
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo.
Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer
towing with your vehicle.
G Warning!
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 212).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
tires. The tires can be considered cold if the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours
or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
the best handling, tread life and riding comfort.
In addition to the Tire and Loading Information placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also
consult the tire inflation pressure label (if
available) on the inside of the filler flap for any
additional information pertaining to special
driving situations. For more information, see
“Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (Y page 216).
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information placard example are for illustration
purposes only. Tire data are specific to
each vehicle and may vary from data shown
in the following illustration. Refer to Tire
and Loading Information placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.
Z
215
Operation
Tires and wheels
1 Tire and Loading Information placard with
recommended cold tire inflation pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight.
The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the
tires installed as original equipment.
Important notes on tire inflation pressure
G Warning!
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly, check the tires for punctures from
foreign objects and/or whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim.
216
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure
are also increased while driving, depending
on the driving speed and the tire load.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap (if available) on how to
adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you
do not adjust the tire inflation pressure,
excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire
inflation pressure label on the inside of the
fuel filler flap, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for proper tire inflation
pressure.
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition. If such information is provided, it
can be found on the tire inflation pressure
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 201).
Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18‡ (10†) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind when
checking tire inflation pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should
wait until the tires are cold before adjusting
the tire inflation pressure.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for vehicle
Potential problems associated with
underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G Warning!
Underinflated tires can
Rcause
excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely
affect fuel economy
Operation
Tires and wheels
Rlead
to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely
affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Overinflated tires can
Radversely
Rcause
affect handling characteristics
uneven tire wear
Rbe
more prone to damage from road hazards
Radversely
Rincrease
affect ride comfort
stopping distance
Checking tire inflation pressure
Safety notes
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least every
other week.
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
If you check the tire inflation pressure when
the tires are warm (the vehicle has been
driven for several miles or sitting less than
3 hours), the reading will be approximately
4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading.
This is normal. Do not let air out to match the
specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.
Checking tire inflation pressure manually
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire
inflation pressure:
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
X
Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
X
Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 212). If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure.
217
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
X
If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
with the tire gauge.
X
Install the valve cap.
X
Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), (USA only)
i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low
tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in
the instrument cluster. Depending on how
the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low
tire pressure condition or a malfunction in
the TPMS system itself:
RIf
the telltale illuminates continuously,
one or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. There is no malfunction in
the TPMS.
RIf
the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
218
i This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as
selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in
pressure in one or more of the tires.
G Warning!
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures.
Always adjust tire inflation pressure
according to the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, on the supplemental tire inflation pressure information
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked every other week when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available,
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the Tire and Loading Information placard or,
if available, the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes
Operation
Tires and wheels
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately
1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement
or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunction develops, it may take up to
10 minutes for the system to signal a malfunction using the TPMS telltale flashing
and illumination sequence.
The telltale extinguishes after a few
minutes driving if the malfunction has been
corrected.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
to malfunction.
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display.
Example illustration
In addition, a warning signal sounds.
Restarting the TPMS
G Warning!
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
level (e.g. because of different load or driving
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
the current tire inflation pressures.
X Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 212) or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure information
on the inside of the fuel filler flap
219
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
(Y page 201), make sure the tire inflation
pressure of all four tires is correct.
X
i Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
recommended for the vehicle operating
condition. Tire pressure should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may
have supplemental tire pressure information for driving at high speeds or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 129).
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
you see the current inflation pressures for
each tire appear in the display or the following message appears in the display
Tire Pressure Monitor
Active
Menu: R-Button
220
X
X
Press the reset button (Y page 124).
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
If you wish to confirm: Press button
æ.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Restarted
After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures
are within the system’s specified range.
Afterwards the current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values and
then monitored.
If you wish to cancel: Press button
ç.
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS), (Canada only)
i This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
It monitors the tire inflation pressure, as
selected by the driver, in all four tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a decrease in
pressure in one or more of the tires.
G Warning!
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
wrongly selected inflation pressures.
Always adjust tire inflation pressure
according to the Tire and Loading Information placard or, if available, on the supple-
Operation
Tires and wheels
mental tire inflation pressure information
on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g.
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding
abrupt steering maneuvers.
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked every other week when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available,
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the Tire and Loading Information placard or,
if available, the tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
multifunction display. The present inflation
pressures are displayed only after a few
minutes’ travel time.
i Possible differences between the readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose,
e.g. gas station equipment, and the vehicle’s control system can occur. Usually the
readings issued by the control system are
more precise.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 129).
X
Press button j or k until the current
inflation pressures for each tire appear in
the multifunction display.
i When the vehicle has been parked for longer than 20 minutes, the message appears
in the multifunction display.
G Warning!
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
of the removed road wheel for some
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
the indicated value where the spare wheel
221
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
is mounted does not reflect the actual
spare tire inflation pressure.
i Operating radio transmission equipment
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
to malfunction.
The TPMS usually recognizes new reference
values automatically, for example when you
have
Radjusted
the tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure warnings
If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display.
Rchanged
wheels or tires
Rmounted
new wheels or tires
The respective tire is indicated by a red rectangle. In addition, a warning signal sounds.
i Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
Restarting Advanced TPMS
G Warning!
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
the TPMS on the recommended cold inflation pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
222
tion for driving at high speeds or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
If you want to set new reference values manually:
X
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
standard display appears in the multifunction display (Y page 129).
X
Press button j or k repeatedly until
you see the current inflation pressures for
each tire appear in the display or the following message appears in the multifunction display
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes.
X
Press the reset button (Y page 124).
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Restart tire
pressure monitor?
Using the Tire and Loading Information
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 212) or, if available, the supplemental tire inflation pressure information
on the inside of the fuel filler flap
(Y page 201), make sure the tire inflation
pressure of all four tires is correct.
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
recommended for the vehicle operating
condition. Tire pressure should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation pressure on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may
have supplemental tire pressure informa-
Operation
Tires and wheels
X
If you wish to confirm: Press button
æ.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Restarted
After driving a few minutes the system verifies that the current tire inflation pressures
are within the system’s specified range.
Afterwards the current tire inflation pressures are accepted as reference values and
then monitored.
Tire labeling
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
7 Tire size designation, load and speed rat-
ing (Y page 224)
8 Load identification (Y page 226)
9 Tire name
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and
tires” (Y page 343).
or
X
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (Y page 230)
If you wish to cancel: Press button
ç.
MOExtended system
The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system in
conjunction with the TPMS (Y page 218) or
the Advanced TPMS (Y page 220).
For information on driving in case of pressure
loss in one or more tires (emergency mode),
see the “Practical Hints” section
(Y page 325).
1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(Y page 229)
2 DOT, Tire Identification Number
(Y page 227)
3 Maximum tire load (Y page 228)
4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
Z
(Y page 228)
223
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire size designation, load and speed
rating
1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
3 Radial tire code
4 Rim diameter
5 Tire load rating
6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
General: Depending on the design standards
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
tire size designation.
224
No letter preceding the size designation (as
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
on European design standards.
Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
standards.
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards.
Letter “T” preceding the size designation:
Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary
emergency use only.
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
additional information, see “Tire speed rating” (Y page 225).
Tire width
Tire width 1 indicates the nominal tire width
in millimeters.
Tire load rating
Aspect ratio
Aspect ratio 2 is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section
width and is expressed in percentage. The
aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section
height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code 3 indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
Rim diameter
Rim diameter 4 is the diameter of the bead
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
G Warning!
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which
may cause an accident and/or serious
injury to you or others.
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as
shown on the original part.
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
Operation
Tires and wheels
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
Tire load rating 5 is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds
to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
tire is designed to support. See also “Maximum tire load” (Y page 228) where the maximum load associated with the load index is
indicated in kilograms and lbs.
For additional information on tire load rating,
see “Load identification” (Y page 226).
Tire speed rating
G Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
serious personal injury and possible death,
for you and for others.
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Tire speed rating 6 indicates the approved
maximum speed for the tire.
Summer tires
Index
Speed rating
Q
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R
up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S
up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W
up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y
up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
Index
Speed rating
ZR...(..Y)
above 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR
above 149 mph (240 km/h)
RAt
the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the
tire must be referred to.
The service description is comprised of tire
load rating 5 and tire speed rating 6.
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description is given,
the tire manufacturer must be consulted
for the maximum speed capability.
If a service description is given, the speed
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
is the service description. The letter “Y”
designates the speed rating and the speed
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
RAny
tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
225
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
in the size designation AND the service
description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
speed rating in parenthesis designates the
maximum speed capability of the tire as
being above 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult
the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
R155
mph (250 km/h):
-
SL 550
-
SL 550 (Sport Package)
-
SL 600
Index
Speed rating
-
SL 600 (Sport Package)
Q M+S9
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
-
SL 63 AMG
T M+S9
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
-
SL 65 AMG
H M+S9
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
M+S9
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
V
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/
snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
9
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
for use in snow conditions.
or M+S.for winter tires
226
R186
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to assist you.
Load identification
mph (300 km/h):
-
SL 63 AMG (Performance Package)
-
SL 65 AMG with increased top speed
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
may have a tire speed rating above the maximum speed permitted by the electronic
speed limiter.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
the “Technical data” section (Y page 343),
for example when purchasing new tires.
If you are uncertain about the correct reading
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
1 Load identification
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
In addition to tire load rating, special load
identification 1 may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating the
tire speed rating 6 (Y page 224).
Operation
Tires and wheels
Manufacturer’s identification mark
RNo specification given: absence of any text
(like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark 2
denotes the tire manufacturer.
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded tires,
see (Y page 209).
RXL
or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire.
RLight
Load: designates a light load tire.
RC,
D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at
a specified pressure.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates
efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety
matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
and “Date of manufacture”.
Tire size
1 DOT
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark
Code 3 indicates the tire size.
3 Tire size
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire
Tire type code
manufacturer)
5 Date of manufacture
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Tire branding symbol 1 denotes that the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Tire type code 4 may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture 5 identifies the
week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week
of the calendar year. The second two figures
represent the year.
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
week of 2002.
227
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire load
G Warning!
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information placard on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
1 Maximum tire load rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
228
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support.
For more information on tire load rating, see
(Y page 224).
For information on calculating total and cargo
load capacities, see (Y page 213).
Maximum tire inflation pressure
G Warning!
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being
overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation
(blowout) because they are more likely to
become punctured or damaged by road
debris, potholes etc.
1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pres-
sure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 215) for proper tire inflation.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.
Government requirement designed to give
drivers consistent and reliable information
regarding tire performance. Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. Although not a
Government of Canada requirement, all tires
made for sale in North America have these
grades branded on the sidewall.
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Treadwear
1 Treadwear
2 Traction
3 Temperature resistance
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
G Warning!
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires
(Y page 234) with a minimum tread depth of
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels
229
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics. On packed
snow, they can reduce your stopping distance
compared to summer tires. Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater
than when the road is not covered with snow
or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by law.
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Tire ply material
Temperature
G Warning!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature
230
This marking tells you about the type of cord
and number of plies in the sidewall and under
the tread.
Tire and loading terminology
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).
Air pressure
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above illustration.
The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bar.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in
percentage.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Bar
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Another metric unit for air pressure. There are
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
and rear axle indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
DOT (Department of Transportation)
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Maximum load rating
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if
applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
total load limit, and production options
weight.
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maximum capacity
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.
pressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals
(kPa) to 1 bar.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
the vehicle including all options, passengers,
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
tongue load). It is indicated on certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Kilopascal (kPa)
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
Maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
(150 lb).
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
their designated seating positions.
231
Z
Operation
Tires and wheels
Production options weight
Rim
The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over 5 lbs
(2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard
items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated.
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means
to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date
of manufacture”.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar and provides best
handling, tread life and riding comfort. If so
equipped, supplemental information pertaining to special driving situations can be found
on the tire inflation pressure label on the
inside of the fuel filler flap.
Sidewall
The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Tire load rating
Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.
Tire ply composition and material used
This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire
232
tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also
must indicate the ply materials in the tire and
sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the speed
range for which a tire is approved.
Total load limit
Rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s designated
seating capacity.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via
the tires. The amount of grip provided.
Tread
The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
that show across the tread of a tire when only
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
Operation
Tires and wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
government testing procedures. The ratings
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
it by two.
Rotating tires
G Warning!
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
are of the same dimension.
If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
rear), tire rotation is not possible.
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
same dimension all around, tires can be
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
(Y page 212).
In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire
manufacturer’s recommended intervals in
the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet
located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If
none is available, tires should be rotated
every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
(spinning) direction must be maintained.
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (Y page 317).
Z
233
Operation
Winter driving
Winter driving
General information
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Winter tires
G Warning!
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are
6
no longer suitable for winter operation.
G Warning!
If you use your spare wheel when winter
tires are fitted on the other wheels, be
aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability
and that overall driving stability may be
reduced. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
provide special winter performance. Make
234
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflake.marking on the tire sidewall.
These tires meet specific snow traction performance requirements of the Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
Association of Canada (RAC) and have been
designed specifically for use in snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the only way to
achieve the maximum effectiveness of your
vehicle’s driving safety systems such as the
ABS and the ESP® in winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have
the same tread design.
Always observe the speed rating of the winter
tires installed on your vehicle. If the maximum
speed for which your tires are rated is below
the speed rating of your vehicle, you must
place a notice to this effect where it will be
seen by the driver. Such notices are available
at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Snow chains
! When driving with snow chains, always
select setting 1 of the vehicle level control.
Other settings may result in damage to your
vehicle.
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid
serious damage to your vehicle or tires,
make sure the use of snow chains is permissible as specified in the “Technical
data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
Snow chains should only be driven on snowcovered roads at speeds not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
as possible when driving on roads without
snow.
Observe the following guidelines when using
snow chains:
RUse
of snow chains is not permissible with
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 343).
RUse
snow chains in pairs and on rear
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
wheels, they may scrape against the body
Operation
Winter driving
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
could be damaged as a result.
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized MercedesBenz Center will be glad to advise you on
this subject.
RUse
of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check local
and state laws before installing snow
chains.
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
i When driving with snow chains, you may
ESP® (Y
wish to switch off the
page 65)
before setting the vehicle in motion. This
will improve the vehicle’s traction.
Winter driving instructions
G Warning!
cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the
vehicle not facing the wind.
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system
under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
the automatic transmission to neutral position N. Try to keep the vehicle under control
by corrective steering action.
G Warning!
i For information on driving with snow
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the
road surface is free of ice. The road may still
be icy, especially in wooded areas or on
bridges.
G Warning!
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 234).
Road salts and chemicals can adversely
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce the
normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
should be tested as soon as possible after
driving is resumed.
Z
235
Operation
Driving instructions
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Driving instructions
Drinking and driving
Drive sensibly – save fuel
G Warning!
To save fuel you should:
RKeep
tires at the recommended inflation
pressures.
RRemove
RAllow
unnecessary loads.
engine to warm up under low load
use.
RAvoid
frequent acceleration and decelera-
tion.
RHave
all maintenance work performed at
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet and as required by the Maintenance system. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountanous areas.
236
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
accident are greatly increased when you
drink or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Pedals
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obstacles. If there are any floormats or carpets
in the footwell, make sure that the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
Operation
Driving instructions
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
and injury.
Power assistance
G Warning!
There is no power assistance for the steering and the service brake when the engine
is not running.
Steering and braking requires significantly
more effort and you could lose control of
the vehicle and cause an accident as a
result.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle
is in motion.
G Warning!
The brake system requires electrical energy
for operation.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp and warning messages in the instrument cluster come on
while driving. To brake, the driver must then
apply significantly greater brake pedal
pressure and depress the pedal much further to obtain the expected brake effect. If
necessary, apply full pressure to the brake
pedal. Brakes are only applied to the front
wheels. Stopping distance is increased! If
there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system, we recommend
that the vehicle be transported with all
wheels off the ground using flatbed or
appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
Brakes
Downhill grades
! When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
overheating of the brakes and reduces
wear.
When using the engine’s braking power, a
drive wheel may not spin for an extended
period of time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Continuous or hard braking
G Warning!
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
for some time, rather than immediately park,
so that the air stream will cool down the
brakes faster.
Wet roads
G Warning!
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through
water deep enough to wet brake components, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected
brake effect. Maintain a safe distance from
vehicles in front.
Z
237
Operation
Driving instructions
The first time the brakes are applied after a
long period of driving in heavy rain without
braking, it is possible that there will be a
delayed braking response and that you will
need to depress the brake pedal more firmly.
You should therefore maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes.
Salt-covered roads
G Warning!
A layer of salt on the brake discs and the
brake linings may cause a delay in the braking effect, resulting in a significantly
increased braking distance, which could
lead to an accident.
To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally
brake carefully when you
are driving on salt-covered roads, so that
any layer of salt that may have built up
on the brake discs and the brake linings
is removed without putting other road
users at risk
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead and drive with particular care
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
trip and immediately after commencing a
new trip, so that salt residues are
removed from the brake disc
Brake service
! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
be too low or the electro-hydraulic brake
system may be malfunctioning if the brake
warning lamp in the instrument cluster
comes on and an acoustic warning sounds
although the parking brake is released.
Observe additional messages in the multifunction display that may appear.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
Only install brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
238
G Warning!
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended
brake fluid is used, the braking properties
of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent
that safe braking is substantially impaired.
This could result in an accident.
! Because the ESP® operates automatically, the engine and ignition must be shut
off (SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
being tested on a brake test dynamometer
or when the vehicle is being towed with the
front axle raised.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes
by applying above-normal braking pressure at
higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip
of the brake pads.
Operation
Driving instructions
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (Y page 64).
High-performance brake system
The high-performance brake system is only
available on SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG.
G Warning!
New vehicle brake pads and discs, and
replacement brake pads and discs may
take several hundred miles of driving until
they provide optimum braking efficiency.
Until that time, you may need to use
increased brake pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware of this and adjust your
driving and braking accordingly during this
break-in period.
Excessive high-demand braking will cause
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition
messages in the multifunction display.
Especially for high performance driving, it
is important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
The high-performance brake system is
designed to operate under the extremely high
operating demands required to accommodate the performance capabilities of the vehicle.
The brakes may produce a squeaking-type
noise depending on the
Rvehicle
Rbrake
speed
force applied
Rambient
conditions, e.g. temperature and
humidity
As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as
brake pads or disks strongly depends on your
driving style and the conditions under which
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style
calling for high demand braking will cause
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.
Driving off
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
extended period with the ESP® switched
off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
the drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces
engine performance and causes premature
brake and drivetrain wear which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
239
Operation
Driving instructions
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
speeds and with new tires.
X Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves
in the road and apply brakes cautiously in
the rain.
Standing water
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Before driving through water, determine its
depth.
If you must drive through standing water,
drive slowly to prevent water from entering
the passenger compartment or the engine
compartment. Water in these areas could
cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or
could result in water being ingested by the
engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
10 Observe
11 Observe
240
all legal requirements.
all legal requirements
Driving abroad
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the US
or Canada, you should request dealer network information for your destination from
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Control and operation of radio transmitter
Safety notes
G Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data system), radio or telephone10 if road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not be
able to observe traffic conditions and could
endanger yourself and others.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Telephones and two-way radios
G Warning!
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna, such as
a portable telephone or a citizens band unit,
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
serious personal injury. Radio transmitters
should only be used inside the vehicle if
they are connected to an antenna that is
installed on the outside of the vehicle.
G Warning!
Please do not forget that your primary
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A
driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking
a telephone call.
If you choose to use the telephone11 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road,
Operation
Maintenance
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile telephone while driving a
vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND11 (Cockpit Management and Data System) if road, weather
and traffic conditions permit.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation
instructions regarding use of an external
antenna.
Emission control
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law.
These systems will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the
engine should, therefore, be carried out only
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any way. Moreover, the specified service procedures must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the Maintenance
Booklet.
G Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and possible
death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under
these conditions, drive only with at least
one window fully open at all times.
Maintenance
Notes
The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks distance driven and the time elapsed
since the last maintenance service, calculates other maintenance service work
required, and calls for the next maintenance
service accordingly.
We strongly recommend that you have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized MercedesBenz Center, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the
maintenance service indicator.
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
and maintenance service indicator at the
designated times/mileage (kilometers) will
result in vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
11 Observe
all legal requirements
241
Operation
Maintenance
Maintenance service indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message
will notify you when the next maintenance
service is due.
Starting approximately 1 month before the
next maintenance service is due, one of the
following messages will appear in the right
multifunction display while you are driving or
when you switch on the ignition (example
service A):
Service A In XXXXX Miles (km)
Service A In XXX Days
Service A Due Now
Clearing the maintenance service indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message
is automatically cleared after approximately
30 seconds when you switch on the ignition
or when reaching the service threshold while
driving.
Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following
message in the right multifunction display:
Service A Exceeded By XXXX Miles (km)
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days
In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service.
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
i The menu overview can be found on
1 Reset button
X
The type of maintenance service due is indicated in the left multifunction display:
9 Basic service (A)
To clear the maintenance service indicator message: Press reset button 1 on
the instrument cluster.
The standard display appears in the multifunction display.
(Y page 128).
You can call up the maintenance service indicator display at any time to check when the
next maintenance service is due.
X Switch on the ignition.
X
Press button è or ÿ on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the
standard display (Y page 129) appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the mainte-
× Extended service (B)
242
Operation
Vehicle care
nance service indicator display with the
service symbol 9 or × appears in
the left multifunction display and the maintenance service deadline appears in the
right multifunction display.
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of
disconnection will not be included in the
count shown by the maintenance service
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
service deadline, you will need to subtract
these days from the days shown in the
maintenance service indicator message or
maintenance service indicator display.
Do not confuse the maintenance service
indicator with the engine oil level indicator
N.
Resetting the maintenance service
indicator
In the event that the maintenance service on
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
maintenance service indicator reset.
The automotive maintenance facility carrying
out the maintenance service will find the
information for resetting the maintenance
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
literature for your vehicle.
Such literature is available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
Mercedes-Benz.
i If the maintenance service indicator was
inadvertently reset, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper maintenance service as called for by the
maintenance service indicator will result in
engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Notes
Regular and proper care will help to maintain
the value of your vehicle.
G Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not
designed for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and
keep them out of reach of children.
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
scouring agents. Never apply strong force
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface to be cleaned.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack
243
Z
Operation
Vehicle care
the paintwork as well as the vehicle underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
RAir
pollution
RRoad
salt
RTar
RGravel
and stone chipping
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
RGrease
and oil
RFuel
RCoolant
RBrake
RBird
fluid
droppings
RInsects
RTree
resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
adverse influences.
244
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
Rnear
the ocean
Rin
industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions)
Rduring
winter operation
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
check is a washing of the underbody followed
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
necessary nor recommended by MercedesBenz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later.
We have selected vehicle-care products and
compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which
always reflect the latest technology. You can
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the vehicle-care products recommended
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references to
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care products.
Power washer
! Follow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance between the vehicle and the
nozzle of the power washer.
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving across
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
rubber parts.
Operation
Vehicle care
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it could be
inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Tar stains
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
Paintwork, painted body components
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
or similar materials to painted body components may damage the paintwork.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
be applied when water drops on the paint
surface do not “bead up”. This should normally be done every 3 to 5 months, depending
on the climate and washing detergent used.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface shows
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax if
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
is still hot.
X
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
doors, etc.).
Engine cleaning
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components
and connectors from contact with water and
cleaning agents.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bushings
and joints should be lubricated. The poly-Vbelt and all pulleys should be protected from
any wax.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
mately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it could be
inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Hand-wash
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in
direct sunlight.
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
clean the vehicle.
Do not spray directly towards the ventilation intake.
X
Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
Shampoo.
X
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water.
X
Do not spray directly towards the ventilation intake.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
and chamois frequently.
X
Rinse with clean water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois.
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
finish.
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within approxi-
Z
245
Operation
Vehicle care
Automatic car wash
You can have your vehicle washed in an automatic car wash from the start. Brushless car
washes are preferable.
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
recirculation mode using button , on
the climate control panel.
prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
which can be caused by residual wax on the
windshield.
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
touchless car wash which uses caustic
spray. Otherwise the caustic spray will
damage the paint or ornamental moldings.
X
246
For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth.
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could
be made of anodized aluminum that will be
damaged when cleaned with chrome
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
those ornamental moldings.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Make sure the combination switch is set
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out.
After running the vehicle through an automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This will
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window cleaning solutions which are not suitable may damage the plastic lamp lenses
of the headlamps. Therefore, do not use
abrasives, solvents or cleaners that contain
solvents.
Ornamental moldings
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
running it through the automatic car wash.
to wiper setting 0. Otherwise, the rain sensor could activate and cause the wipers to
move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle damage.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the
vehicle through an automatic car wash to
prevent damage to the mirrors.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
side markers, turn signal lenses
X
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
Cleaning the Distronic system sensor
cover
1 Distronic system sensor cover
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Only clean sensor cover 1 by hand.
X
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water and a non-scratching
cloth to clean sensor cover 1.
Operation
Vehicle care
X
Restart the engine after cleaning sensor
cover 1.
Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors
X
Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
into place.
! The windshield wipers must be in a verti-
X
cal position before folding them away from
the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.
Never open the hood when the wiper arms
are folded forward.
Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
inserts with a clean cloth and mild detergent solution.
X
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
blades
Parktronic system sensors are located in the
front and rear bumper.
1 Parktronic system sensors in front
bumper
X
Only clean sensor cover by hand.
X
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water and a soft, nonscratching cloth to clean sensors 1 on the
bumpers.
! Applying strong pressure may damage
X
Make sure the hood is fully closed.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Turn combination switch to wiper setting
II (Y page 105).
X
With wiper arms in vertical position, switch
off the ignition.
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)
before cleaning the windshield and/or the
wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor
could suddenly turn on and cause injury.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
the windshield before turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO).
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield.
! To clean the window interior, do not use
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
containing solvents. Do not touch the
inside of the front, rear or side windows
with hard objects such as an ice scraper or
ring. Doing so may damage the windows.
Z
the sensor covers.
247
Operation
Vehicle care
Rear window cleaning
Clean the rear window with the hardtop fully
raised and closed.
it has been cleaned, especially not after the
wheel rims have been cleaned with wheel
rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners can lead to
increased corrosion of the brake disks and
brake pads. Non-approved wheel cleaners
may also damage the wheel paint if the
vehicle is not driven after cleaning.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is
parked after cleaning. To do so, please
drive your vehicle for several minutes to
allow the brakes to dry. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
G Warning!
Do not clean the rear window with the hardtop in a position other than the fully raised
and closed position. Otherwise, the hardtop may move unexpectedly which may
result in personal injury to you or others.
X
Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
Light alloy wheels
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
clear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after
248
Plastic and rubber parts
X
X
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
solution.
Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
solution.
The surface may temporarily change color.
If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
G Warning!
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or
the steering wheel. Cleaners containing
solvents will make the surface porous and
vehicle occupants could suffer serious injuries from plastic parts coming loose in the
event of air bag deployment.
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
Hard plastic trim items
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
pressure.
COMAND display
! You must switch off the COMAND display
and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
These can damage or even destroy the
audio display screen.
X
Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Operation
Vehicle care
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Upholstery
X
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the
upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be
prevented.
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Carpets
X
Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
Headliner
X
Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
Seat belts
X
Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
! The seat belts must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
(80†) or in direct sunlight.
G Warning!
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a natural product and is therefore subject to a natural aging process. Leather upholstery may
also react to certain ambient influences such
as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with MercedesBenz approved Leather Care.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
RWipe
with light pressure only.
RDo
not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo
not soak the leather upholstery.
As leather is a natural product, it could
otherwise harden or become porous.
RExercise
particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
Wood trims
X
Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Chrome-plated exhaust tip
Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has been
washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause corrosion.
Z
249
250
Practical hints
Vehicle equipment ............................
Where will I find ...? ..........................
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display .......................
What to do if … ..................................
Unlocking/locking manually ...........
Replacing SmartKey batteries .........
Replacing bulbs .................................
Replacing wiper blades ....................
Flat tire ..............................................
Battery ...............................................
Jump starting ....................................
Towing the vehicle ............................
Fuses ..................................................
252
252
255
293
307
309
311
316
317
326
328
330
334
251
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle
might not be equipped with all features
described in this manual.
Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
i Check expiration dates and contents for
completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items.
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the trunk floor.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
R2
open-end wrenches
RAlignment
RElectric
RFuse
bolt
air pump
chart
RHex-socket
wrench
RInterchangeable
slot/Phillips screwdriver
RJack
RPair
of universal pliers
RProtective
1 Handle
2 Lid
252
RTowing
RValve
wrap (if available)
eye bolt
extractor
RWheel
wrench
X
Pull handle 1 upward.
X
Fold lid 2 down.
X
Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 82).
X
Remove the first aid kit.
X
Lift the trunk floor.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Spare wheel
G Observe Safety notes, see
page 317.
The spare wheel is located in the space underneath the trunk floor.
X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 82).
1 Electric air pump
2 Tool bag
5 Jack
6 Wheel wrench
3 Storage well casing
4 Protective wrap
Jack
i For transporting the damaged road wheel,
use protective wrap 4 (if available).
X
To access jack and wheel wrench:
Remove storage well casing 3.
X
Remove the spare wheel (Y page 253).
X
Lift the trunk floor.
X
Remove the storage well casing
(Y page 253).
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes.
If you use the jack for any other purpose,
you or others could be injured, as the jack
is designed only for the purpose of changing a wheel.
When using the jack, observe the safety
notes in the “Mounting the spare wheel”
section and the notes on the jack.
1 Spare wheel
2 Tensioning strap12
3 Retaining screw
4 Storage well casing base
Z
12 Vehicles
with 19" spare wheel only.
253
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
X
Remove storage well casing base 4.
X
Remove retaining screw 3 by turning it
counterclockwise.
X
Remove spare wheel 1.
For information on mounting the spare wheel,
see “Flat tire” (Y page 317).
Storing the spare wheel after use
If you wish to store the spare wheel after use,
carry out the following steps. Otherwise, the
spare wheel may not fit the spare wheel well.
! Make sure the spare wheel is dry before
storing it.
X
Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the
collapsible tire.
X
Unscrew the valve insert from the valve
using the valve extractor integrated in the
valve cap.
X
Allow the air to escape.
i It may take a few minutes for the collapsible tire to deflate completely.
X
Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X
Screw the valve cap back on the valve.
254
i Vehicles with 19" spare wheel only:
Before placing the spare wheel in the spare
wheel well fasten tensioning straps, see
“Compressing the collapsible
tire” (Y page 254).
X
Place the spare wheel in the spare wheel
well.
X
Secure the spare wheel by turning retaining
screw 3 clockwise.
Compressing the collapsible tire
This description applies to vehicles with
19" spare wheel only.
The collapsible tire on a 19" spare wheel must
be compressed with two tensioning straps
before you can store it in the spare wheel well.
i The tensioning straps are shown in red for
illustration purposes. The tensioning straps
on the spare wheel of your vehicle are
black.
X
Extend the tensioning strap by pulling the
slider.
X
Place tensioning strap around the spare
wheel rim and collapsible tire with the
buckle facing the inside of the rim.
X
Close the buckle.
X
Pull the loose end of the tensioning strap.
The tensioning strap must be pulled as tight
as possible.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Notes
Warning and malfunction messages appear in
the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages
are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this
Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the Vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(Y page 134) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button (Y page 124) or button
j, k, · or è on the multifunction steering wheel.
Other messages of high priority and messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display using
the reset button (Y page 124) or button
j, k, · or è on the multifunction steering wheel. They are then stored in
the Vehicle status message memory menu
(Y page 134). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear.
Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear.
G Warning!
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken
note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see information about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warning/
indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and
malfunction messages that may appear in the
multifunction display.
For your convenience the messages are divided into text messages (Y page 256) and
Symbol messages (Y page 269).
Z
255
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages
ABS
ABS, ESP Inoperative
See Oper. Manual.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The electro-hydraulic brake system is still
functioning normally but due to a malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the
hill start assist system (SL 63 AMG only)
are unavailable.
X
Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
ABS
ABS, ESP Unavailable
See Oper. Manual
The self-diagnosis may not be completed The display will clear after driving a short distance
yet.
at a vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
ABS
ABS, ESP Unavailable
See Oper. Manual
The electro-hydraulic brake system is still
functioning normally but due to a malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and the
hill start assist system (SL 63 AMG only)
are unavailable.
X
Continue driving with added caution. Wheels
may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
256
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
ESP
ESP Inoperative
See Oper. Manual
The electro-hydraulic brake system is still X Continue driving with added caution.
functioning normally but due to a malfunc- X Have the system checked at an authorized
tion the ESP® and the hill start assist
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
system (SL 63 AMG only) are unavailable.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
The ABS may not be operational.
risk of an accident.
ESP
ESP Unavailable
See Oper. Manual
X Synchronize the ESP®. With the vehicle staThe electro-hydraulic brake system still
functions normally but due to insufficient
tionary, turn the steering wheel completely to
power supply the ESP® and the hill start
the left and then to the right.
assist system (SL 63 AMG only) are
! When synchronizing the ESP®, make sure you
unavailable.
can turn the steering wheel in both directions
as far as it will go without the wheels hitting
any objects, e.g. a road curb.
If the message in the multifunction display does
not disappear:
X
Continue driving with added caution.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the
risk of an accident.
Z
257
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Front Passeng.
Airbag
Enabled See Oper.
Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The passenger front air bag is activated
while driving even though a child, small
individual, or object below the system’s
weight threshold is on the passenger seat,
or the passenger seat is empty. Objects
on the seat or forces acting on the seat
may make the system sense supplemental weight.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
possible.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Open the passenger door.
X
Remove child and child restraint from passenger seat.
X
Make sure no objects which apply forces to the
seat are present. The system may recognize
such forces as supplemental weight and sense
that an occupant on the passenger seat is of a
greater weight than actually present.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger
door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 5/ indicator lamp
(Y page 52) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 30) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe 5/ indicator lamp in the center con-
sole should illuminate and remain illuminated,
258
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
indicating that the OCS (Y page 50) has deactivated the passenger front air bag.
message Front Passeng. Airbag Enabled See Oper. Manual or the message
Front Passeng. Airbag Disabled See
Oper. Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system
to complete the necessary check cycles and to
make sure neither message appears in the
multifunction display.
Rthe
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
passenger seat again. Depending on the passenger classification sensed by the OCS, the
5/ indicator lamp will remain illuminated
or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
If the 5/ indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any children 12 years old and
under and other small individuals use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Z
259
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Front Passeng.
Airbag
Disabled See Oper.
Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The passenger front air bag is deactivated
while driving even though an adult or
someone larger than a small individual is
occupying the passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat may make the system
sense a decrease in weight.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as
possible.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit
the vehicle.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger
door and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 5/ indicator lamp
(Y page 52) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster (Y page 30) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition
switched on,
Rthe 5/ indicator lamp should illuminate
and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 50) has deactivated the front passenger front air bag.
260
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
message Front Passeng. Airbag Enabled See Oper. Manual or the message
Front Passeng. Airbag Disabled See
Oper. Manual should not appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system
to complete the necessary check cycles and to
make sure neither message appears in the
multifunction display.
Rthe
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the
passenger seat again. Depending on the passenger classification sensed by the OCS, the
5/ indicator lamp will remain illuminated
or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not
working properly. Have the system checked as
soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
If the 5/ indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the passenger seat even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any passenger use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Z
261
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Driving systems
Display messages
ABC
ABC
ABC
Malfunction Stop
Car
Malfunction Stop
Car
Malfunction Stop
Car
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have started driving although the
vehicle level is still too low.
The vehicle is being raised. The ABC message goes out after a few seconds.
X
Stop your vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Wait until the message disappears from the
multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
The vehicle is losing oil.
The ABC message is continuously shown.
X
Stop your vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location and press
the vehicle level control button to select a
higher vehicle level (Y page 157).
The ABC is malfunctioning.
If the vehicle does not raise, observe the following when you continue to drive:
X Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid
damaging the front fenders.
262
X
Listen for scraping noises.
X
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The capability of the ABC system is
restricted. This can impair handling.
X
Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
The vehicle’s level is too low while at a
standstill. The vehicle will be raised.
X
Do not drive off.
X
Wait until the message disappears from the
multifunction display.
You may then drive off.
Cruise Control Inoperative
And SPEEDTRONIC
The cruise control is malfunctioning.
X
Have cruise control checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
- - - MPH
(USA only)
- - - Km/h
(Canada only)
One of the activation conditions for cruise
control has not been fulfilled. For example, you attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h), if the situation allows, and set the speed.
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 145).
One of the activation conditions for Distronic has not been fulfilled. For example,
you attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and set
the speed.
X
Check the activation conditions for Distronic
(Y page 150).
The Distronic or the display are malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
ABC
ABC
Malfunction
Vehicle Rising
Please Wait
Cruise Control
DTR - - - MPH
(USA only)
DTR - - - Km/h
(Canada only)
DISTRONIC
Inoperative
Z
263
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
DTR
Override
You have accelerated. The Distronic has
switched off.
X
Stop accelerating.
DISTRONIC
Currently Unavailable. See Oper.
Manual
Distronic is deactivated because:
X
If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in the
area of the radiator grille (Y page 246).
X
If necessary, wait until the system has cooled
down.
X
Restart the vehicle.
RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille
is dirty.
RThe
functionality is impaired by heavy
precipitation or fog
RThe
system is overheated.
Distronic becomes operational again without the
engine being restarted when:
Rdirt
on the radiator grille has fallen off while
driving (e.g. slush or snow)
Rthe
system recognizes full sensor availability
(due to lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe
message in the multifunction display disappears
You can then operate Distronic as usual again.
264
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
DISTRONIC
Currently Unavailable. See Oper.
Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impaired by external interferences, e.g. high-frequency sources such
as toll stations, speed measuring systems
etc.
X
Leave the area of the external interference.
X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 150) when the
message in the multifunction display disappears.
Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has not sensed any other
vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,
for a long time.
X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 150) when the
message in the multifunction display disappears.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You have attempted to start the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
while the automatic transmission was not
in park position P.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
You have attempted to turn off the engine
with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
while the automatic transmission was not
in park position P.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
Vehicle
Display messages
P
Gear Selector
Lever To P
Z
265
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Tires
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Tire pressure
displayed after
driving for a few
minutes.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canada
only): The tire inflation pressure is being
checked.
X
Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS
(Canada only) is malfunctioning.
X
Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Inoperative
No Wheel Sensors
There are wheels without appropriate
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires).
X
Have the TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS
(Canada only) checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
266
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Wheel Sensor
Missing
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canada
only):
One or more sensors are defect (e.g. battery is empty).
The respective tire is indicated by – –
instead of the tire inflation pressure in the
multifunction display.
X
Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
One or more wheels without appropriate
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare tire).
The respective tire is indicated by – –
instead of the tire inflation pressure in the
multifunction display.
X
Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS
(Canada only) is unable to monitor the tire
pressure due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have
been removed, the TPMS or Advanced TPMS
automatically becomes active again after a few
minutes driving.
Tire Pressure
Monitor
Currently Unavailable
Z
267
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Please correct
the tire pressure.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canada
only):
The tire pressure is too low in one or more
tires.
or
The tire pressures of the individual tires
differ from each other significantly.
The tire pressure values are shown in the
multifunction display.
X
Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
required (Y page 217).
Caution
Tire defect
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canada
only):
One or more tires are deflating.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 318).
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS (Canada
only):
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
already below the minimum value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X
Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 318).
Check Tires
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
268
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Z
269
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Symbol messages
Brake
Display messages
T
T
270
Reduced Brake
Effect Depress
brake pedal fully.
Reduced Brake
Effect Service
Required
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The electro-hydraulic brake system is in
emergency operation mode. Considerably
greater brake pedal force is required and
the brake pedal travel is longer. The stopping distance is increased.
The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph
(90 km/h).
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Do not drive any further.
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Do not drive any further.
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is in
emergency operation mode. Considerably
greater brake pedal force is required and
the brake pedal travel is longer. The stopping distance is increased.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning!
Driving while one of the previous messages
is displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
If the electro-hydraulic brake system enters
its emergency operation mode, the driver
must apply significantly greater brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further than normal to obtain braking
effect.
Display messages
;
(USA only)
3
Reduced Brake
Effect Start
Engine
If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is
increased!
If there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system, we recommend
that the vehicle be transported with all
wheels off the ground using flatbed or
appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended
towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
the ground is only permissible for distances
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not
to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more
information, see “Towing the vehicle”.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The battery has insufficient voltage and
cannot supply sufficient power to the electro-hydraulic brake system.
X
Start the engine.
The message disappears when sufficient voltage is available.
(Canada only)
G Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carDisplay messages
2
Brake Wear
bon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can
cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The brake pads have reached their wear
limit.
X
Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
Z
271
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
G Warning!
Have brake pad replacement and other
work on the electro-hydraulic brake system
carried out by qualified technicians only.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
The electro-hydraulic brake system must
be deactivated prior to working on the sysDisplay messages
;
(USA only)
3
(Canada only)
tem. High pressure is intermittently built up
in the system as part of its automatic selftest.
In addition, the system is automatically
activated when the vehicle is unlocked by
remote control, when the driver or passenger door is opened, when the SmartKey in
the starter switch is turned to position 1 or
Possible cause/consequence
Check Brake Fluid
Level
the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button is
pressed once, when the brake pedal is
depressed or when the parking brake is
released. Failure to deactivate the system
prior to maintenance will cause brake pistons to extend and brake fluid to leak,
which may result in injuries (contusions and
acid burns). Extended brake pistons may
also cause injury.
Possible solution
There is insufficient brake fluid in the res- Risk of accident!
ervoir.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Do not drive any further.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the
problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.
272
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
Display messages
;
(USA only)
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Brake Service
Required
There are malfunctions, but the electrohydraulic brake system is operating normally.
X
Brakes Overheated
Drive on, but with
even greater care.
The brake system is overheated due to an Relieve the load on the brake system:
excessive load on the brakes.
X Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid
unnecessary braking.
3
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
(Canada only)
;
(USA only)
3
(Canada only)
;
(USA only)
Release Parking
Brake
You are driving with the parking brake
engaged.
X
When driving down steep grades, shift into a
lower gear to use the engine’s braking power
(Y page 120).
X
Cautiously continue driving so that the air
stream will cool down the brakes.
X
Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada only)
Z
273
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Safety systems
Display messages
\
\
Raise Roll-over
Bar
Raise Roll-over
Bar
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The roll bar is malfunctioning.
For safety reasons, always have the roll bar raised
when driving with the retractable hardtop open.
X Attempt to raise the roll bar using the roll bar
button (Y page 59).
X
Have the roll bar checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The roll bar was raised automatically and
you have attempted to open or close the
retractable hardtop.
X
Raise the roll bar manually until you hear the
roll bar lock into place (Y page 59).
X
Open or close the retractable hardtop.
L
Tele Aid Inoperative
One or more main functions of the Tele Aid
system are malfunctioning.
X
Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
1
Restraint System
Malfunction
Service Required
There is a malfunction in the supplemental
restraint systems. The air bags or the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
X
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked immediately.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
274
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
¨
The trunk is open.
X
Close the trunk.
O
You are driving with the hood open.
X
Close the hood (Y page 204).
?
You are driving with the hood and the tailgate open.
X
Close the hood and the tailgate.
2
You are driving with at least one door
open.
X
Close the door(s).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
You are pressing the lock button on the
door handle and at least one door is open.
X
Close the door(s).
2
Check Doors
Z
275
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
K
Retract. Roof
Oper.
Please Wait
See Oper. Manual
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
X
Start the engine.
The hardtop drive system was shut down After about 10 minutes you can open or close the
for safety reasons after multiple, consec- retractable hardtop.
utive attempts to raise or lower the hard- X Switch on the ignition.
top.
X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.
X
If the retractable hardtop still does not open or
close properly, have the hardtop system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
K
Retractable Roof
Lowering
The retractable hardtop is not completely
opened or closed. The roof hydraulics will
start to lose pressure.
X
Make sure the retractable hardtop is completely opened or closed (Y page 173).
K
Retractable Roof
Operation Only At
Standstill
You have attempted to open the retractable hardtop while driving.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location and try to
open the hardtop again.
276
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
K
Retractable Roof
Not Opened/Closed
Completely
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
You are driving with the retractable hardtop not properly locked.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Observe the
traffic situation around you.
X
Pull or push on the retractable hardtop switch
until the retractable hardtop is completely
open or closed (Y page 173).
X
If the retractable hardtop still does lock properly, have the hardtop system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
M
Trunk Partition
Open
You are trying to open or close the retractable hardtop even though the luggage
cover in the trunk is not closed and/or
properly engaged.
X
Close the luggage cover and engage it into the
side holders (Y page 178).
I
Key Detected In
Vehicle
A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the
vehicle was recognized while locking the
vehicle from the outside.
X
Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
I
Remove Key
You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
I
Replace Key
The SmartKey is malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
I
Change Key Batteries
The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are discharged.
X
Replace the batteries (Y page 309).
Z
277
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
I
I
I
Key Not Detected
Key Not Detected
Key Not Detected
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not
detected while the engine is running
because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
X
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be centrally locked nor can
the engine be started again after the engine is
stopped.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not
detected while the engine is running
because there is strong radio-frequency
interference.
X
Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO in the starter switch.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
momentarily not detected.
X
Change the position of the SmartKey in the
vehicle.
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the
starter switch if necessary.
X
Connect the telephone to the COMAND system
via Bluetooth®.
X
Add washer fluid (Y page 208).
t
Bluetooth Ready
W
Top Up Washer Fluid The washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir has fallen below the minimum level.
278
The telephone has not yet been connected to the COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
_
Entry Position
Do Not Drive
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The steering wheel has not yet moved into
its stored driving position.
X
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
There may be a malfunction in:
X
Have the engine checked as soon as possible
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wait until the steering wheel has moved to its
driving position.
The message disappears.
Engine
Display messages
ú
Engine Service
(USA only)
RThe
fuel management system
±
RThe
ignition system
RThe
exhaust system
RThe
fuel system
(Canada only)
±
Service Required
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The coolant temperature display or the
tachometer may have failed.
X
Have the electronic systems checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
B
Top Up Coolant
See Oper. Manual
The coolant level is too low.
X
Add coolant (Y page 207).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the
cooling system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
279
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat causing major engine damage.
Display messages
Ì
Coolant
Stop car, switch
engine off.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The coolant is too hot.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as possible.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Only start the engine again after the message
disappears. You could otherwise damage the
engine.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster.
X
If the temperature rises again: Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and stopand-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
280
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could
be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the engine hood. Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
281
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Ì
282
Coolant
Stop car, switch
engine off.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as possible.
X
Turn off the engine immediately.
X
Check the poly-V-belt.
X
If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the
vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster.
X
Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately.
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Ì
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.
X
Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster.
If the coolant temperature is under 248‡
(120†), you may continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g.
by driving uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
X
Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
Ralternator
X
If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in
damage to the engine. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjust
driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
#
Rbroken
Ra
malfunctioning
poly-V-belt
malfunction in the electronic system
Do not forget that the brake system
requires electrical energy and may be
operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is
required and the stopping distance is
increased.
Z
283
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
#
N
N
Battery/Alternator
Stop Car
Engine Oil Level
Check Level
Possible solution
The battery is defective.
The electro-hydraulic brake system
requires electrical energy and therefore
has only limited operation. Considerably
greater brake pedal force is required and
the stopping distance is increased.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced
braking responsiveness.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Vehicles with oil dipstick only:
The engine oil has dropped to a critical
level.
X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 204) and add
engine oil as required (Y page 206).
X
If you must add engine oil frequently, have the
engine checked for possible leaks.
X
Add engine oil (Y page 206) and check the
engine oil level (Y page 204).
Add 1 qt engine oil Vehicles with engine oil measuring system
at next refueling. only:
(USA only)
The engine oil level is too low.
Add 1 liter engine
oil at next refueling.
(Canada only)
If the message Add 1 qt (Canada: 1 liter)
engine oil at next refueling or Engine
Oil Level Check Level appears while the
engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to
approximately the minimum level.
284
Possible cause/consequence
The message will be stored in the vehicle status message memory after you have cleared
it from the multifunction display.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
For information on approved engine oils contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
displayed could result in serious engine
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
N
Engine Oil Level
Cannot measure
eng. oil level.
Vehicles with engine oil measuring system
only:
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
X
Have the measuring system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
N
Engine Oil Level
Reduce Oil Level
Vehicles with engine oil measuring system
only:
You have added too much engine oil.
There is a risk of damaging the engine or
the catalytic converter.
X
Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all
legal requirements with respect to its disposal.
N
Engine Oil Level
Stop car, switch
engine off.
There is no oil in the engine. There is a
danger of engine damage.
X
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon
as it is safe to do so.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Add engine oil (Y page 206) and check the
engine oil level (Y page 204).
The fuel level has dropped below the
reserve mark.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
The fuel level has dropped below the
reserve mark.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
¿
4
Reserve Fuel
Z
285
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
4
Fuel Cap Open
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
A loss of pressure has been detected in
the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be
closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky.
X
Check the fuel cap (Y page 201).
X
If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X
If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
Lamps
Display messages
.
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is
malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
Reverse Lamp Left
or
Reverse Lamp Right
The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
.
Brake Lamp Left
Auxiliary Bulb On
or
Brake Lamp Right
Auxiliary Bulb On
The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
3rd Brake Lamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if
all LEDs have stopped working.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
286
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Front Foglamp Left
or
Front Foglamp
Right
The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
Marker Lamp Front
Left
or
Marker Lamp Front
Right
The front left side or right side marker
lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
Marker Lamp Rear
Left
or
Marker Lamp Rear
Right
The rear left side or right side marker lamp
is malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
Parking Lamp Front
Left
Auxiliary Bulb On
or
Parking Lamp Front
Right
Auxiliary Bulb On
The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
Z
287
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
High Beam Left
or
High Beam Right
The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
.
License Plate Lamp
- Left
or
License Plate Lamp
- Right
The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
.
AUTO Light
Inoperative
The light sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps come on automatically.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X
In the control system, set daytime running
lamp mode to manual (Y page 138).
X
Switch off the headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch (Y page 99).
.
Low Beam Left
or
Low Beam Right
The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
.
Rear Foglamp Left
The left rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
288
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Lights Are still On You have removed the SmartKey from the X Turn the exterior lamp switch to M or
starter switch, opened the driver’s door
U (Y page 99).
and left the headlamps on or removed the
or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in
vehicle and left the headlamps on.
the exterior lamp switch to its stop.
.
Tail Lamp
Auxiliary
or
Tail Lamp
Auxiliary
Left
Bulb On
The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being used.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
Right
Bulb On
.
Cornering Lamp
Left
or
Cornering Lamp
Right
The left or right corner-illuminating lamp
is malfunctioning.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
.
Turn Signal Rear
Left
Auxiliary Bulb On
or
Turn Signal Rear
Right
Auxiliary Bulb On
The left or right rear turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 311).
Z
289
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
.
Turn Signal Front
Left
Auxiliary Bulb On
or
Turn Signal Front
Right
Auxiliary Bulb On
The left or right front turn signal lamp is
malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being
used.
X
Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(Y page 313).
.
Turn Signal Left
Mirror
or
Turn Signal Right
Mirror
The turn signal in the left or right exterior
rear view mirror is malfunctioning. This
message will only appear if all LEDs have
stopped working.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
290
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Tires
Display messages
Possible cause/consequence
Possible solution
H
Please correct the
tire pressure.
The tire pressure is too low in one or more
tires.
or
The tire pressure of the individual tires differ from each other significantly.
X
Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
required (Y page 217).
H
Tire Pressure
Caution
Tire Defect
One or more tires are deflating.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 318).
Tire Pressure
Check Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
already below the minimum value.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
X
Check and adjust tire pressure as required.
X
If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 318).
H
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
291
Z
Practical hints
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and
result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
292
Practical hints
What to do if …
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
Notes
If any of the following lamps in the instrument
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self-
check when switching on the ignition, have
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
(except high beam headlamp indicator lamp,
and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a
lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come
on when the ignition is switched on, have it
checked and replaced if necessary.
Z
293
Practical hints
What to do if …
Brake
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
- The yellow ABS indicator
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
The ABS has detected a malfunc- X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during hard
tion and switched off. The BAS,
braking, reducing steering capability.
the ESP® and the hill start assist X Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
system (SL 63 AMG only) are also
display (Y page 255).
switched off (see messages in
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
multifunction display).
as soon as possible.
The electro-hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
but without the systems specified
above available.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the
automatic transmission may also
be malfunctioning.
- The yellow ABS indicator
lamp comes on while the
engine is running.
The ABS has switched off due to When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is operainsufficient power supply.
tional again and the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
The battery might not be charged X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator and
sufficiently.
the battery checked.
294
Suggested solutions
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
You are driving with the parking
brake engaged.
X
Release the parking brake.
; (USA only)
3 (Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while the engine is running and you hear a warning
sound.
There is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system.
There is insufficient brake fluid in
the reservoir.
X
Risk of accident! Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe
location as soon as it is safe to do so.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Read and observe messages that may appear in the multifunction
display (Y page 255).
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning
lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously
burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for
brake pad thickness and leaks.
Z
295
Practical hints
What to do if …
Safety systems
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
< The red seat belt telltale
The seat belt telltale reminds you X Fasten your seat belts.
comes on for a maximum and your passenger to fasten
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
of 6 seconds after starting your seat belts before driving off. belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
the engine.
starting the engine.
< You hear a warning chime You have forgotten to fasten your
for a maximum of 6 secseat belt.
onds after starting the
engine.
X
Fasten your seat belt.
The warning chime stops sounding.
< The red seat belt telltale
comes on while the vehicle
is standing still and the
engine is running or during
driving.
You and/or your passenger have
forgotten to fasten your seat
belts.
X
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
There are items placed on the
passenger seat and therefore the
system senses the passenger
seat as being occupied.
X
Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them in
a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
296
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
< During driving the red seat
belt telltale flashes and
you additionally hear an
intermittent warning
chime with increasing
intensity.
The vehicle’s speed once
exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and
you and/or your passenger have
forgotten to fasten your seat
belts.
X
Fasten your seat belts.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding.
There are items placed on the
passenger seat and therefore the
system senses the passenger
seat as being occupied.
X
Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a safe
place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The
seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the driver and passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a door is opened.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
1 The red SRS indicator
There is a malfunction in the
lamp comes on while driv- restraint systems. The air bags or
ing.
Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Suggested solutions
X
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational.
Z
297
Practical hints
What to do if …
For your safety, we strongly recommend that you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked;
otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy
unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
v All models, except
SL 63 AMG:
The yellow ABS/ESP®
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is running.
The ESP® has been switched off.
Risk of accident!
When the ESP® is switched off it
will not stabilize the vehicle if the
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning.
X
Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 66).
X
If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X
If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
v SL 63 AMG only:
The yellow ABS/ESP®
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is running.
ESP® SPORT is activated.
Risk of accident!
When ESP® SPORT is activated it
will only stabilize the vehicle to a
limited extent if the system recognizes that the vehicle starts to
skid or that a wheel is spinning.
X
Switch the ESP® SPORT off (Y page 67).
The message ESP-ON appears in the multifunction display.
298
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
v SL 63 AMG only:
¯ The yellow ABS/ESP®
warning lamp and the yellow ESP® OFF warning
lamp come on while the
engine is running.
The ESP® has been switched off.
Risk of accident!
When the ESP® is switched off it
will not stabilize the vehicle if the
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning.
X
Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 66).
X
If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X
If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system checked
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
v The yellow ABS/ESP®
warning lamp comes on
while the engine is running.
The ESP® is not operational due
to a malfunction.
Risk of accident!
X
Read and Observe additional messages that may appear in the
multifunction display.
X
Continue driving with added caution.
X
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
X
When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X
While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X
Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 66).
v The yellow ABS/ESP®
warning lamp flashes
while driving.
The ESP® or Electronic Traction
System (ETS) has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire.
The cruise control and the Distronic system are deactivated.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.
Z
299
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
C The yellow roll bar warning The roll bar system is malfunclamp comes on when the tioning.
engine is running.
Suggested solutions
For safety reasons, always have the roll bar raised when driving with
the retractable hardtop open.
X Attempt to raise the roll bar manually (Y page 59).
X
G Warning!
If the yellow roll bar warning lamp \ in
the instrument cluster does not go out after
starting the engine, or if it comes on while
driving, the roll bar system is not operating
300
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
as soon as possible.
properly and may not activate in an accident. At the same time, the message Raise
Roll-over Bar appears in the multifunc-
tion display. In this case, raise the roll bar
manually before continuing to drive.
For safety reasons, drive only with the roll
bar raised until the malfunction is repaired.
Have your vehicle checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Driving systems
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
E The white Distronic indica- You are too close to the vehicle in
tor lamp comes on while front of you to maintain selected
driving.
speed.
X
Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following distance.
E The red distance warning
lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning
sound.
You are gaining too rapidly on the
vehicle ahead of you or the distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on
your probable line of travel.
X
Apply the brakes immediately.
X
Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake or
maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
Vehicle
Problem
4 The yellow fuel tank
The fuel level has gone below the
reserve warning lamp
reserve mark.
comes on when the engine
is running.
X
Refuel at the next gas station.
4 The yellow fuel tank
The fuel cap is not closed propreserve warning lamp
erly.
comes on when the engine
is running.
X
Close the fuel cap.
Z
301
Practical hints
What to do if …
Engine
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
ú (USA only)
± (Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on when
the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction in:
X
RThe
fuel management system
RThe
ignition system
RThe
emission control system
RSystems
Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as soon
as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check local
requirements.
which affect emis-
sions
Such malfunctions may result in
excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limphome (emergency operation)
mode.
ú (USA only)
± (Canada only)
The yellow engine malfunction
indicator lamp comes on when
the engine is running.
302
A loss of pressure has been
detected in the fuel system. The
fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be
leaky.
X
Check the fuel cap (Y page 201).
X
If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X
If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
Ì The red coolant temperature warning lamp comes
on when the engine is running.
There is insufficient coolant in the
reservoir.
If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in the cooling system.
If the coolant level is correct, the
electric radiator fan may be broken.
X
Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating
(Y page 207).
X
Have the cooling system checked.
X
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you can continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go driving.
X
Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine
and coolant to cool down.
Ì The red coolant tempera- The coolant temperature has
ture warning lamp comes exceeded 248‡ (120†).
on when the engine is running and you hear a warning sound.
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked
into the engine compartment to catch fire.
You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur just
by opening the engine hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away
from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get
out of the vehicle and do not stand near the
vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248‡
(120†). Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
Z
303
Practical hints
What to do if …
Tires
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
Suggested solutions
H USA only:
Combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale for the
TPMS illuminates continuously.
Canada only:
Low tire pressure telltale
for the Advanced TPMS
illuminates continuously.
The TPMS (USA only) or
Advanced TPMS (Canada only)
detects a loss of pressure in at
least one tire.
X
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
(Y page 255).
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
H USA only:
There is a malfunction in the
Combination low tire pres- TPMS.
sure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale for the
TPMS flashes 60 seconds
and then stays illuminated.
G Warning!
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked every other week when
cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
304
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
(Y page 255).
X
Have the TPMS checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available,
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has tires
of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.
Practical hints
What to do if …
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires are significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct
tire pressure, even if underinflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
USA only:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately
1 minute and then remain continuously illu-
minated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Lamp in center console
Problem
Possible cause/consequence
5/
The system is malfunctioning.
The indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual
on the passenger seat.
Suggested solutions
X
Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (Y page 255).
Z
305
Practical hints
What to do if …
G Warning!
If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates
and remains illuminated with the weight of
Problem
a typical adult or someone larger than a
small individual on the passenger seat, do
Possible cause/consequence
5/
The system is malfunctioning.
The indicator lamp does not illuminate and/or does not remain
illuminated with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a
standard child restraint or less on
the passenger seat.
G Warning!
If the 5/ indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the weight of
a typical 12-month-old child in a standard
child restraint or less on the passenger
seat, do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
306
not have any passenger use the passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
Suggested solutions
X
Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
and check installation of the child seat.
X
Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the seat
are present.
X
If the indicator lamp remains out, have the system checked as soon
as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and follow
corrective steps (Y page 255).
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key.
X
Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow.
Unlocking the trunk
X
Slide mechanical key 2 out of the housing.
A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m)
is required to open the trunk lid.
Unlocking the driver’s door
i Unlocking the vehicle with the mechanical key and opening the driver’s door or the
trunk will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Removing the mechanical key
$ Unlocking
2 Mechanical key
X
Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s
door lock until it stops.
X
Turn mechanical key 2 counterclockwise
to position $ until the locking knob moves
up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
X
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
Pull the door handle to open the driver’s
door.
1 Handle
% Unlocking
3 Mechanical key
X
Insert mechanical key 3 into the trunk lid
lock until it stops.
X
Turn mechanical key 3 counterclockwise
to position %.
X
Pull handle 1 and lift the trunk lid.
! Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.
X
Turn mechanical key 3 back and remove
it from the trunk lid lock.
307
Z
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the glove box
X
Lockable storage areas in the passenger
compartment include:
Rthe
glove box
Rthe
storage compartment under the armrest
Rthe
1 Mechanical key
% Separately unlocking the glove box
308
Check whether the trunk is locked.
X
If it is not locked, lock it with the mechanical key (Y page 86).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
should now be locked.
ical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
If these cannot be unlocked by means of the
SmartKey, use the mechanical key to unlock
the glove box.
ments, the cause for the malfunction of the
SmartKey must be determined and corrected, see (Y page 76).
X
i Unlocking the glove box with the mechan-
rear storage compartments
i To unlock the remaining storage compart-
Slide mechanical key 1 into the glove box
lock and turn it counterclockwise to position %.
You can now open the glove box.
Locking the vehicle
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as follows:
X Close the passenger door and the trunk.
$ Locking
2 Mechanical key
X
Press the central locking switch
(Y page 81).
X
Check to see whether the locking knob on
the passenger door has moved down.
X
Insert mechanical key 2 into the driver’s
door lock until it stops.
X
If necessary, push it down manually.
X
X
Exit the vehicle and close the driver’s door.
X
Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 307).
Turn mechanical key 2 clockwise to position $.
The driver’s door is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the antitheft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
filler flap and the storage compartments.
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
screw 2 approximately one quarter of a
turn.
The storage compartments can be locked
separately (Y page 182).
Lowering the load assist manually
If the load assist feature does not fully lower
the retractable hardtop into the trunk compartment and you are unable to close the
trunk lid, follow the instructions below.
X
Hook luggage cover into holders
(Y page 178).
X
Let go of the hardtop.
It should gradually lower into the trunk.
X
When hardtop is completely lowered,
return locking screw 2 to its original position.
X
Remove the trunk floor from the trunk.
X
Have a second person lift and hold the
retracted hardtop.
X
Using hex-socket wrench 1 provided in
the vehicle tool kit, carefully turn locking
If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be locked
or unlocked. It is recommended to have the
batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G Warning!
X
Replace the trunk floor.
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries
out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
X
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
G Warning
! Do not overtighten the screw.
1 Hex-socket wrench
2 Locking screw
Replacing SmartKey batteries
SmartKey batteries contain Perchlorate
material, which may require special handling and regard for the environment.
Check with your local government’s disposal guidelines. California residents, see
http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste /Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of
disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
309
Z
Practical hints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
X
Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
X
X
Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
arrow.
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
X
Check the operation of the SmartKey as
well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
i The required replacement batteries are
X
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
SmartKey housing.
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
CR 2025 or equivalent.
X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 307).
3 Batteries
4 Contact springs
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
310
X
Pull out batteries 3.
X
Insert new batteries 3 under contact
springs 4 with the positive terminal (+)
side facing up.
X
Return battery compartment 2 into
SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs
Safety notes
Safe vehicle operation depends to a large
degree on proper exterior lighting and signaling.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp
adjustment.
the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a
qualified technician.
Bulbs
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
fogged up on the inside as a result of high
humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
the lights on should clear up the fogging.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot.
Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
Rtouch
Rdrop
or move it when hot
the bulb
Rscratch
the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it
is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair
Z
311
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
1 Additional turn signal
lamp
Rear lamps
Type
Lamp
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
Type
grease.
RIf
the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
LED
7 Rear fog lamp (driver’s
side only)
P 21 W
2 Turn signal lamp
PY 24 W
LED
3 Low- and high-beam
headlamp13
D1S-35 W
8 High-mounted brake
lamp
Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
lamps replaced at an authorized MercedesBenz Center:
9 Backup lamp
P 21 W
RAdditional
4 High-beam/high-beam
flasher lamp
H7 (55 W)
Parking and standing
lamp
Corner-illuminating
lamp
5 Front fog lamp
6 Side marker lamp
W5W
(Blue
Vision)
a Brake lamp, tail lamp,
LED
parking and standing
lamp, side marker lamp
b License plate lamps
C5W
c Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
H7 (55 W)
H11 (55 W)
W5W
Notes on bulb replacement
ROnly use 12 volt bulbs of the same type and
with the specified watt rating.
to prevent short circuits.
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when han-
dling bulbs.
312
RFront
turn signal lamps
RHigh-mounted
RBi-Xenon
RFront
RSide
brake lamp
lamps
fog lamps
marker lamps
RParking and standing lamps in the tail lamp
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb
13 Low
turn signal lamps in the exterior
rear view mirrors
unit
RBrake
RRear
lamps
fog lamp
! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You
could otherwise damage the LEDs or parts
of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs replaced
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
beam and high beam use the same D1S-35 W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
5 Bulb socket for corner-illuminating lamp
bulb
G Warning!
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in
Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the
bulb or repair the lamp and its components.
We recommend that you have such work
done by a qualified technician.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
lamp, do the following first:
X Switch off the ignition.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
M.
X
Open the hood (Y page 203).
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
1 Housing cover for high-beam headlamp,
parking and standing lamp, corner-illuminating lamp
X
Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.
X
Pull out bulb socket 2.
X
Turn bulb socket 3 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove it.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.
X
Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket
3.
X
Insert bulb socket 3 into the guide in the
headlamp.
X
Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it
engages.
Driver’s side headlamp: Cable outlet 4
of bulb socket 3 must point towards the
lower right.
Passenger side headlamp: Cable outlet
4 of bulb socket 3 must point towards
the lower left.
X
Place bulb socket 2 back into the housing.
X
Align housing cover 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
2 Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
bulb
3 Bulb socket for high-beam bulb
4 Cable outlet for high-beam bulb
313
Z
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Parking and standing lamp bulb
X
Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.
X
Pull out bulb socket 2.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 2.
X
Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket
2.
X
Place bulb socket 2 back into the housing.
X
Align housing cover 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Corner-illuminating lamp bulbs
X
Turn housing cover 1 counterclockwise
and remove it.
X
Turn bulb socket 5 counterclockwise and
remove it.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5.
X
Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket
5.
X
Insert bulb socket 5 into the guide in the
headlamp.
314
X
X
Turn bulb socket 5 clockwise until it
engages.
The handle of the bulb socket must be vertical.
Tail lamp unit
Opening the driver’s side trim panel
Align housing cover 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
lamp, do the following first:
X
Switch off the ignition.
X
Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
M.
1 Lock
2 Cover
X
Open the trunk.
X
Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°.
X
Remove cover 2.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Opening the passenger side trim panel
Replacing bulbs
X
Align the respective bulb socket and press
it into the tail lamp unit until it audibly
engages.
X
Reinstall the trim.
License plate lamps
1 Lock
2 Cover
X
Move lock 1 in direction of the arrow and
remove cover 2.
Example illustration bulb socket passenger side
1 Turn signal lamp
2 Backup lamp
i The lamps on the driver's side are mirrored.
X
X
X
Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, turn bulb socket 1 or 2 counterclockwise and remove it.
Press gently onto the respective bulb and
turn clockwise out of its bulb socket.
Press the new bulb gently into its bulb
socket and turn counterclockwise until it
engages.
1 Screws
2 Lamp cover
X
Loosen both screws 1.
X
Remove lamp cover 2.
X
Replace the bulb.
X
Reinstall lamp cover 2.
X
Retighten screws 1.
Z
315
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass without a wiper blade
inserted.
For your convenience, we recommend that
you have this work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Replacing wiper blades
Safety notes
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)
before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise,
the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and
cause injury.
Placing wiper arms in vertical position
G Warning!
arms should only be folded forward when
in the vertical position.
! Never open the hood when a wiper arm is
folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
316
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
X
Turn combination switch to wiper setting
II.
X
With wiper arms in vertical position, turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to position 0.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
Wiper blades are components that are subject to wear and tear. Replace the wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be
able to observe surrounding traffic conditions and could cause an accident.
! To avoid damage to the hood the wiper
Vehicles with SmartKey
X
Turn off the engine.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter
switch is now in position 1.
X
Turn combination switch to wiper setting
II.
X
With wiper arms in vertical position, open
the driver’s door.
The starter switch is set to position 0, same
as the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch.
X
Turn combination switch to wiper setting
0.
Wiper arms in vertical position
X
Make sure the hood is fully closed.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing wiper blades
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
Installing wiper blades
X
Slide the wiper blade onto wiper arm in
opposite direction of arrow.
X
Rotate the wiper blade into position parallel
to the wiper arm.
X
Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
They could tear.
X
Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps
into place.
! Make sure the wiper blades are properly
installed. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
X
Turn the wiper blade at a right angle to
wiper arm.
X
Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the
retainer.
Flat tire
Safety notes
G Warning!
The dimensions of the spare wheel are different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Contact the nearest authorized MercedesBenz Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
Z
317
Practical hints
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Mounting the spare wheel
X
Park the vehicle in a safe distance from
moving traffic on a hard, flat surface when
possible.
X
Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
X
Turn the steering wheel so that the front
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
X
Engage the parking brake.
Rjack
X
Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
Rvehicle
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
or
X
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door can then be closed again.
Open doors only when conditions are safe
to do so.
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
safe distance from the roadway. Open
doors only when conditions are safe to do
so.
318
Introduction
X
Prepare the vehicle as described
(Y page 318).
X
Take the following out of the vehicle:
Rspare wheel
Rwheel
tool kit
wrench
Relectric
air pump
For information on where to find the respective items, see “Where will I
find ...?” (Y page 252) and (Y page 253).
Removing tensioning straps from spare
wheel
This description applies to vehicles with 19"
spare wheel with collapsible tire only.
A 19" spare wheel with collapsible tire has
two tensioning straps on it that must be
removed before mounting the spare wheel.
i The tensioning straps are shown in red for
illustration purposes. The tensioning straps
on the spare wheel of your vehicle may be
of a different color.
1 Buckle
2 Clip
X
Press on both clips 2 simultaneously to
release buckle 1.
X
Store the tensioning straps in a safe place.
You will need them to store the spare wheel
in the trunk after use.
Lifting the vehicle
G Warning!
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the
jack which has been specifically approved
by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jack tubes built into
both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the
Practical hints
Flat tire
jack arm is fully inserted in the jack tube.
The jack must always be vertical when in
use, especially on inclines or declines.
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited
for performing maintenance work under
the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury,
use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a
wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
Always firmly set the parking brake and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or
other sizeable objects before raising the
vehicle with the jack. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should
use a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar
objects to support the jack. Otherwise the
jack may not be able to achieve its loadbearing capacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
X
G Warning!
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or
on slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you
or others.
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
blocking wheels with wheel chocks (not
included) or other sizeable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
X
Place one wheel chock or other sizeable
object in front of and another wheel chock
or other sizeable object behind the wheel
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should circumstances require you to do so on a hill, place a
wheel chock or other sizeable object and the
other wheel chock or sizeable object as follows:
X
Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side blocking both
wheels of the axle not being worked on.
1 Wheel wrench
X
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not
yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately
one full turn with wrench 1).
The jack support tubes are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
G Warning!
When turning the wheel wrench to loosen
the wheel bolts, make sure you position
319
Z
Practical hints
Flat tire
X
your hands on the wrench in such a way
that you avoid injury to yourself, such as
scraping your hands against the wheel.
Make sure turning the wheel wrench will
not scratch or damage the wheel rim.
Remove cover 2, taking care not to damage the locking tabs.
! Do not position the jack on the body of
the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
2 Jack support tube cover (SL 63 AMG,
SL 65 AMG, and vehicles with Sport Package only)
X
Open cover 2 by pressing at point indicated by arrow.
or
X
2 Jack support tube cover (except
SL 63 AMG, SL 65 AMG, and vehicles with
Sport Package)
Insert a flat blade screwdriver in the opening of cover 2 and pry it out.
3 Crank
4 Jack arm
5 Jack support tube hole
X
G Warning!
Insert the jack fully into the jack support
tube hole up to the stop. Otherwise, the
vehicle may fall from the jack and cause
personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
X
320
Insert jack arm 4 fully into tube hole 5
up to the stop.
Keeping jack in this position, turn crank
3 clockwise until the jack base meets the
ground. Make sure the jack is vertical.
Practical hints
Flat tire
X
Place jack 3 on firm ground.
X
Position jack 3 under take-up bracket
2 so that it is always vertical as seen from
the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an
incline.
X
Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing the wheel
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
X
Remove the wheel.
Attaching the spare wheel
G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel
is properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
could fall off the jack.
X
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
hub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.
G Warning!
1 Alignment bolt
X
Unscrew uppermost wheel bolt and remove
it.
X
Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt
1 supplied with the vehicle tool kit.
X
Remove the remaining bolts.
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident. Be
sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
X
Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment
bolt and push it on.
X
Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
321
Z
Practical hints
Flat tire
X
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X
Install last wheel bolt and tighten it slightly.
X
Inflate the collapsible tire (Y page 322).
Inflating the collapsible tire
trical plug are located at the bottom of the
pump housing.
The following description applies to both versions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared.
G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel
is properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
Version 2
2 Air pump switch
G Warning!
3 Electrical plug
4 Pressure gauge
Observe safety instructions on air pump
label.
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating
the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may
be damaged.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of
two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion
1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
behind a flap.
RVersion
2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and elec-
322
Version 1
1 Flap
2 Air pump switch
3 Electrical plug
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
screw
5 Union nut
5 Union nut
6 Deflate button
X
Version 1 only: Open flap 1 on electric
air pump.
X
Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug
3 and air hose with pressure gauge 4.
X
Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug 3 and
the air hose out of the pump housing bottom.
X
Version 1 only: Close vent screw on air
hose 4.
Practical hints
Flat tire
X
Remove the valve cap from the collapsible
tire valve.
tion to avoid burning yourself when using
the equipment.
X
Screw union nut 5 onto the collapsible tire
valve.
! Do not operate the electric air pump lon-
X
Make sure air pump switch 2 is set to 0.
X
Insert electrical plug 3 into the cigarette
lighter socket (Y page 186) or a power outlet (Y page 187).
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
ger than 8 minutes without interruption.
Otherwise it may overheat.
You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear
selector lever once. Do not depress the
brake pedal.
X
Press I on electric air pump switch 2.
The electric air pump switches on and
inflates the collapsible tire.
X
Inflate the collapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified
for your vehicle (Y page 346).
This should take approximately 5 minutes.
G Warning!
The air hose and the union nut can become
hot during inflation. Exercise proper cau-
Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation
pressure as specified for your vehicle
(Y page 346), decrease tire pressure using
the vent screw on air hose 4.
X
Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressure
is above the recommended tire inflation
pressure as specified for your vehicle
(Y page 346), decrease tire pressure using
deflate button 6.
! Compare the recommended tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
label on the spare wheel rim differs from
the values given in this Operator’s Manual,
inflate the tire to the recommended tire
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim.
or
X
X
X
Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
X
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
or
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the gear
selector lever twice. Do not depress the
brake pedal.
G Warning!
Follow recommend inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflating tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout)
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes, etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated
tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely
to fail from being overheated.
X
Detach the electric air pump.
X
Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.
X
Version 1 only: Store electrical plug 3
and air hose 4 behind flap 1 and place
Z
323
Practical hints
Flat tire
the electric air pump back in its designated
storage space.
Make sure turning the wheel wrench will
not scratch or damage the wheel rim.
X
Version 2 only: Store electrical plug 3
and the air hose back into the pump housing bottom.
X
X
Place the electric air pump back in its designated storage space.
Before storing the jack in the trunk, crank
back to storage position and fold in the jack
arm.
X
X
Lower the vehicle.
Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
in the designated storage space.
Lowering the vehicle
G Warning!
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel
is properly attached.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
air pump before lowering the vehicle.
X
Lower the vehicle by turning crank counterclockwise until the vehicle is resting fully
on its own weight.
X
Pull the jack out of the jack support tube.
1 – 5 Wheel bolts
For information on storing the spare wheel in
the trunk after it has been replaced by a regular road wheel, see (Y page 253).
X
i The flat tire may be transported in the
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to
5), until all bolts are tight. Observe a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
G Warning!
i Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS:
Do not restart the tire inflation pressure
monitor until a full size wheel/tire with
functioning sensor has been placed back
into service on the vehicle.
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque
of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).
G Warning!
When turning the wheel wrench to tighten
the wheel bolts, make sure you position
your hands on the wrench in such a way
that you avoid injury to yourself, such as
scraping your hands against the wheel.
324
trunk when the retractable hardtop is
closed. If available use a protective wrap on
the spare wheel.
Replacing jack support tube cover
X Slide tongue of cover under the upper edge
of the tube opening.
X
Applying even pressure, press cover until it
snaps into place.
Practical hints
Flat tire
Be careful not to damage the locking tabs
or clamp the plastic retaining strap.
MOExtended system
The MOExtended system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tires.
You may only use the MOExtended system in
conjunction with the TPMS (Y page 218) or
the Advanced TPMS (Y page 220).
The maximum distance in emergency mode
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 30 miles
(50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.
The point at which the maximum driving distance in emergency mode begins is when the
warning message appears in the multifunction display indicating that there is a loss of
tire inflation pressure.
X Do not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
G Warning!
In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
characteristics are diminished in such situations as:
Rdriving
around curves
Rwhile
braking
Rwhile
accelerating rapidly
Therefore, your driving style must be
adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering
and driving maneuvers, as well as driving
over obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or offroad areas). This is especially important if
the vehicle is heavily loaded.
The emergency driving distance that can be
achieved greatly depends on the demands
placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can
be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is
driven cautiously, somewhat longer.
Do not continue driving in emergency mode
if
Ryou
notice knocking sounds
Rthe
vehicle starts to shake
Rsmoke
RESP®
Ryou
is intervening continuously
notice tears on the tire sidewalls
After driving in emergency mode, you must
have the rims inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
suitable for further use. The failed tire must
be replaced in any case.
When replacing individual or all tires on the
vehicle, make sure only tires marked with
“MOExtended” are mounted in the size specified for your vehicle (Y page 343).
develops and you smell rubber
Z
325
Practical hints
Battery
Battery
Safety notes
These batteries should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve their rated service
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery
charge checked more frequently.
When replacing a battery, always use a battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
G Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and
smoking are prohibited
when handling batteries.
Avoid creating sparks.
326
Battery acid is caustic. Do
not allow it to come into
contact with skin, eyes or
clothing.
Wear suitable protective
clothing, especially
gloves, apron and faceguard.
Wear eye protection.
Rinse any acid spills
immediately with clear
water. Contact a physician if necessary.
Keep children away.
Follow the instructions in
this Operator’s Manual.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the
environment if disposed of improperly. Large
12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of
disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
G Warning!
Failure to follow these instructions can
result in severe injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
immediately flush affected area with water
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
G Warning!
Do not place metal objects on the battery
as this could result in a short circuit.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the
risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead
Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as
“fleece” battery.
Such batteries do not require topping-up of
the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries there-
Practical hints
Battery
fore do not have cell caps and the battery
cover is non-removable. Do not attempt to
open the battery as otherwise the battery
will be damaged.
Even though VRLA batteries do not require
topping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be opened to check the electrolyte
level, the battery condition must be
checked periodically by performing a battery conductance test. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery condition testing
intervals.
The factory-equipped VRLA battery is leakproofed. Only use a battery as replacement
that has the same security features and is
of identical size, voltage, and capacity as
the factory-equipped battery.
! As with any other battery, have the battery disconnect at a qualified workshop or
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you
do not intend to operate your vehicle for an
extended period of time to prevent battery
discharge. You may also connect an accessory battery charge unit expressly
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to maintain the battery charge.
Contact an authorized Mercedes- Benz
Center for further information.
The battery, the battery ventilation hose
and the lateral plug must always be
securely installed when the vehicle is in
operation.
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
clamps while the engine is running or the
SmartKey is in the starter switch or KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1. Otherwise
the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged.
Have the battery checked regularly at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.
i Only replace a discharged battery with a
battery recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
i After battery power was interrupted, do
the following:
RSynchronize
RSynchronize
the ESP® (Y page 257).
the power windows
(Y page 108).
Charging the battery
G Warning!
Never charge a battery while still installed
in the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
being used. Gases may escape during
charging and cause explosions that may
result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
available, permitting the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery
charger.
Have batteries charged at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the batteries yourself, follow the operating instructions
for your charging device.
Only use a battery charge unit with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Z
327
Practical hints
Jump starting
X
Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.
Jump starting
G Warning!
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with
eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does,
immediately flush affected area with water,
and seek medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive.
Keep flames or sparks away from battery,
avoid improper connection of jumper
cables, smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
328
! Jump starting should only be performed
on the starter battery installed in the engine
compartment.
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a
battery quick-charge unit.
If the engine does not run after several
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end is
still attached to a battery.
Practical hints
Jump starting
If the starter battery is discharged, the engine
can be started with jumper cables and the
battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
RJump
starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter
are cold.
RDo
not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
X
Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
Start engine of the vehicle with the charged
battery and run at idle speed.
X
X
Open the hood.
X
Remove cover from battery positive terminal.
Connect negative terminals 3 and 4 of
the batteries with a jumper cable. Clamp
the cable to negative terminal 4 of the
charged battery first.
X
Start engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery and run at idle speed.
You can now turn on the electrical consumers. Do not switch on the headlamps under
any circumstances.
X
Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 1 and 2 and then from
positive terminals 3 and 4.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
X
Have the battery checked at the nearest
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ROnly
jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
with a more powerful battery could damage
the vehicle’s electrical system, which will
not be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
use jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
the cable to positive terminal 1 of the
charged battery first.
ROnly
RAlways
make sure the jumper cables are
not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
that move when an engine is started or running.
G Warning!
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.
1 Positive terminal of charged battery
2 Positive terminal of discharged battery
3 Negative terminal of discharged battery
4 Negative terminal of charged battery
! Never invert the terminal connections!
X
Z
Connect positive terminals 1 and 2 of
the batteries with a jumper cable. Clamp
329
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Safety notes
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
be transported with all wheels off the ground
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. This method is preferable to other
types of towing.
! To prevent damage during transport, do
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.
G Warning!
The electro-hydraulic brake system
requires electrical power to operate.
A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply
or electrical system may impair brake system operation and switch it into its emergency operation mode. In such a case, the
red brake warning lamp comes on and
warning messages appear in the multifunction display while driving. To brake, the
driver must then apply significantly greater
brake pedal pressure and depress the pedal
much further to obtain the expected braking effect. If necessary, apply full pressure
to the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied
to the front wheels. Stopping distance is
330
increased! For more information, see “Electro-hydraulic brake system” in this in this
Operator’s Manual.
If there is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system, we recommend
that the vehicle be transported with all
wheels off the ground using flatbed or
appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
If circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be
towed with all wheels on the ground or front
axle raised only so far as necessary to have
the vehicle moved to a safe location where
the recommended towing methods can be
employed.
X Switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle with all wheels off the
ground or front axle raised (Y page 72).
! Before towing the vehicle observe the following instructions:
RDo
not tow-start the vehicle. You could
otherwise seriously damage the automatic transmission which is not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RDo
not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
RTowing
of the vehicle should only be
done using the properly installed towing
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
i If the battery is disconnected or discharged
Rthe
SmartKey will not turn in the starter
switch
Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
park position P
RFor
more information see “Battery” (Y page 326) or “Jump starting” (Y page 328).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt
USA only
Canada only
1 Cover
1 Cover
X
Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the
arrow.
X
X
Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the
arrow and pull on lower edge simultaneously.
X
Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Depending on whether you are towing a vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
which are located behind covers on each
bumper.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the vehicle tool kit, located in the compartment
underneath the trunk floor (Y page 252).
X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.
Removing cover in front bumper
X
Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by the
arrow.
X
Lift cover 1 off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Removing cover in rear bumper
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible serious burns or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust
pipe is extremely hot.
Z
331
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Fixing towing eye bolt
Example illustration USA, bumper in Canada differs
slightly
1 Cover
X
Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into upper
left or right recess of cover 1.
X
Loosen cover 1 using the lever.
X
Fold cover 1 down in direction of arrow to
reveal the threaded hole for the towing eye
bolt.
Example illustration front bumper
1 Towing eye bolt
X
Take the towing eye bolt 1 and the wheel
wrench from the vehicle tool kit.
X
Screw towing eye bolt 1 clockwise into
threaded hole to its stop.
X
Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
tighten towing eye bolt 1 by turning it
clockwise.
Removing towing eye bolt
332
X
Loosen towing eye bolt 1 counterclockwise with wheel wrench.
X
Unscrew towing eye bolt 1.
X
Reinstalling front cover: Fit locking tabs
of cover 1 (Y page 331) under the lower
edge of the opening in the bumper.
X
Apply even pressure on the upper part of
the cover until it snaps into place.
X
Reinstalling rear cover: Fit cover 1
(Y page 331) and snap it into place.
X
Store the towing eye bolt and wheel wrench
back into the vehicle tool kit.
Towing with front axle raised
When towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised, the wheels on the ground have to
move freely.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into neutral position N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
If engaged, release the parking brake.
X
Switch off the automatic central locking
(Y page 140).
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the starter switch.
X
Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 102).
! Make sure that the ignition is switched
off. If the starter switch is in position 2,
active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
system.
! The vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed
not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Towing with all wheels on the ground
G Warning!
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow
with a tow bar if:
Rthe
engine will not run
Rthere
is a malfunction in the electrohydraulic brake system
Rthere
is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is
in starter switch position 2.
G Warning!
i To signal turns while being towed with the
hazard warning flasher in use you can activate the combination switch for the left or
right turn signal in the usual manner – only
the selected turn signal will operate. Upon
canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to
keep in mind that a considerably higher
degree of effort is necessary to brake and
steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving
accordingly.
X
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X
With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X
Shift the automatic transmission into neutral position N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
If engaged, release the parking brake.
X
Switch on the hazard warning flasher
(Y page 102).
! The vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed
not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Z
333
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuses
Introduction
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
If a fuse is blown, the components and systems secured by that fuse will stop operating.
G Warning!
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the
cause determined and remedied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A blown fuse must be replaced by an appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or
the fuse rating given on the fuse) of the
amperage recommended in the fuse chart.
Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to
advise you on this subject.
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized MercedesBenz Center.
334
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
cause determined and rectified by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
A fuse chart is located in the trunk with the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 252). The fuse chart
explains the fuse allocation and fuse amperages.
The electrical fuses are located in fuse boxes
on the driver’s side of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the engine
compartment, under passenger-side rear
storage compartment or in the trunk.
Before replacing fuses
X
Engage the parking brake.
X
Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Turn off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed again.
Fuse box in passenger compartment
The fuse box is located under the rear passenger-side storage compartment.
1 Clips
2 Storage compartment floor
X
Opening: Open the passenger door.
X
Open the rear passenger-side storage compartment (Y page 182).
X
Lift both clips 1.
X
Remove storage compartment floor 2 in
direction of arrow.
X
Closing: To reinstall storage compartment
floor 2 after checking or replacing fuses,
follow the procedure in reverse order.
Practical hints
Fuses
! The fuse box cover must be properly positioned as described to prevent moisture or
dirt from entering the fuse box and possibly
impairing fuse operation.
Fuse box in trunk
Fuse box in engine compartment
The fuse boxes are located on the driver’s and
passenger side in front of the bulkhead (wall
separating the engine and passenger compartment).
X Opening: Open the hood.
The fuse in the trunk is located on the righthand side of the trunk.
X Lift up the trunk floor cover.
Fuse box on passenger side
1 Fuse box cover
2 Locking
3 Unlocking
X
With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
the fuse box 1.
Fuse box on driver’s side
1 Fuse box cover
X
Move slide to position 3 and lift fuse box
cover 1.
2 Locking
3 Unlocking
X
Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is
properly positioned.
X
Hook fuse box cover 1 onto tabs and close
it.
X
Move slide to position 2.
! The fuse box cover must be properly positioned with the slide at the j symbol to
335
Z
Practical hints
Fuses
prevent moisture and/or dirt from entering
the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse
operation.
X
Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
Emergency engine shut-down
If the engine cannot be turned off as described (Y page 114), you may use the following
emergency procedure.
X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 252).
X
Find row “Engine emergency stop” in the
fuse chart table to identify the fuses that
have to removed as well as their locations.
X
Remove the respective fuses.
336
Technical data
Vehicle equipment ............................
Parts service .....................................
Warranty coverage ...........................
Identification labels ..........................
Engine ................................................
Rims and tires ...................................
Electrical system ..............................
Main dimensions ...............................
Weights ..............................................
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. .......
338
338
338
339
340
343
348
349
350
350
337
Technical data
Warranty coverage
Vehicle equipment
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle
might not be equipped with all features
described in this manual.
Parts service
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
required for maintenance and repair work. In
addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts
service.
More than 300 000 different parts for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has
been specifically developed, manufactured or
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
should be installed.
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the
warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance
with the terms of the following warranties:
RNew Car Limited Warranty
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
RState
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
338
Warranty coverage
REmission
System Warranty
REmission
Performance Warranty
RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode
Island, and Vermont Emission Control Systems Warranty
Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Technical data
Identification labels
Loss of Service and Warranty Information booklet
Identification labels
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
2 VIN
1 Certification label (on driver’s door
B-pillar)
3 Paintwork code
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can
be found in the following locations:
Ron the certification label
Rembossed
underneath a trim below the
passenger-side rear storage compartment
lid (Y page 340)
Ron
the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 340)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
2 VIN
3 Paintwork code
Z
339
Technical data
Engine
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
7 Engine number (engraved on engine)
8 VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
9 Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards
Passenger-side rear storage compartment
4 Compartment lid
5 Compartment trim
6 VIN
X
Open compartment lid 4.
X
Remove compartment trim 5.
VIN 6 is now visible.
340
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine number.
Technical data
Engine
Engine
Model
SL 550 (230.471)14
SL 600 (230.477)14
Engine type
273
275
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
12
Bore
3.86 in (98.00 mm)
3.23 in (82.00 mm)
Stroke
3.56 in (90.50 mm)
3.43 in (87.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
333.2 cu in (5 461 cm3)
336.4 cu in (5 513 cm3)
Compression ratio
10.7:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
382 hp / 6 000 rpm (285 kW / 6 000 rpm)15
510 hp / 5 000 rpm (380 kW / 5 000 rpm)15
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
391 lb-ft / 2 800 rpm - 4 800 rpm
(530 Nm / 2 800 rpm - 4 800 rpm)
612 lb-ft / 1 900 rpm - 3 500 rpm
(830 Nm / 1 900 rpm - 3 500 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6 500 rpm
5 950 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
2 398 mm
2 335 mm
14 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
15 Premium
fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
341
Z
Technical data
Engine
Model
SL 63 AMG (230.470)16
SL 65 AMG (230.479)16
Engine type
156
275
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
12
Bore
4.02 in (102.20 mm)
3.25 in (82.60 mm)
Stroke
3.72 in (94.60 mm)
3.66 in (93.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
378.8 cu in (6 208 cm3)
364.9 cu in (5 980 cm3)
Compression ratio
11.3:1
9:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
518 hp / 6 800 rpm (386 kW / 6 800 rpm)17
603 hp / 4 800 rpm - 5 100 rpm
(450 kW / 4 800 rpm - 5 100 rpm)17
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
465 lb-ft / 5 200 rpm (630 Nm / 5 200 rpm)
738 lb-ft / 2 000 rpm - 4 000 rpm
(1 000 Nm / 2 000 rpm - 4 000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
7 000 rpm
5 950 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9
Poly-V-belt
2 360 mm
2 335 mm
16 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.
17 Premium
342
fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rims and tires
Notes
! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
vehicle and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the
following on the tire’s sidewall:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment tires
RMO1
= Mercedes-Benz Original equipment tires (applicable to selected tire
sizes only)
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires with limited run-flat characteristics) original equipment tires
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
For information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 325).
! Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
Rpoor handling characteristics
Rincreased
noise
Rincreased
fuel consumption
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
dimensional variations and different tire
deformation characteristics that could
cause them to come into contact with the
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the
tires or the vehicle may be the result.
i Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. A placard with the recommended
tire inflation pressures is located on the
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may
have supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for driving at high speeds or for
vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the
placard located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should
be checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manu-
facturer’s maintenance recommendation
included with the vehicle.
For information on recommended tire inflation pressure and supplemental tire inflation
pressure information for special driving situations, see (Y page 215).
i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your
vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are
not available as standard or optional factory equipment, but can be purchased from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Depending on vehicle model and the standard or optional factory-equipped wheel
rim/tire configuration on your vehicle
(Appearance Package, Sport Package etc.),
equipping your vehicle with winter tires
approved for your vehicle model may also
require the purchase of two or four wheel
rims of the recommended size for use with
these winter tires. For more information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
343
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model
SL 550
SL 550 (Sport Package)
SL 600
SL 600 (Sport Package)
SL 63 AMG
SL 63 AMG
SL 63 AMG (Performance Package)
SL 65 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
Winter tires18,19
255/40 R18 95V M+S.
or
255/40 R18 95V M+S.
MOExtended20
255/40 R18 95V XL (Extra
Load) M+S.
255/35 R19 96V XL (Extra Load)
M+S.
18 Radial-ply
tires
available as factory equipment.
20 Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Canada vehicles) only.
19 Not
344
Technical data
Rims and tires
Mixed size tires
Front axle
Model
SL 550
SL 600
SL 550 (Sport Package)
SL 600 (Sport Package)
SL 63 AMG
SL 63 AMG (Performance Package)
SL 65 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 18 H2
8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.38 in (35 mm)
1.18 in (30 mm)
Summer tires21
255/40 R18 95W
or
255/40 R18 95Y MOExtended22
255/40 R18 95Y
or
255/40 R18 95Y MOExtended22
255/35 ZR19 96Y XL (Extra Load) MO1
Z
21 Radial-ply
22 Must
tires
be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Canada vehicles) only.
345
Technical data
Rims and tires
Rear axle
Model
SL 550
SL 600
SL 550 (Sport Package)
SL 600 (Sport Package)
SL 63 AMG
SL 63 AMG (Performance Package)
SL 65 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
9.5 J x 18 H2
9.5 J x 18 H2
9.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset
1.57 in (40 mm)
1.57 in (40 mm)
1.22 in (31 mm)
Summer tires23,24
285/35 R18 97W
or
285/35 R18 97Y MOExtended25
285/35 R18 97Y
or
285/35 R18 97Y MOExtended25
285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load) MO1
23 Radial-ply
tires
not be used with snow chains.
25 Must be used in conjunction with Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Canada vehicles) only.
24 Must
346
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow
label on the spare wheel rim differs from
the values given in this Operator’s Manual,
inflate the tire to the recommended tire
inflation pressure given on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure
of the spare wheel differs from the tire
inflation pressure of the road tires.
Model
SL 550
SL 550 (Sport Package)
SL 600
SL 600 (Sport Package)
SL 63 AMG
SL 63 AMG (Performance Package)
SL 65 AMG
Rim
6 B x 17 H2
6 B x 18 H2
6.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset
0.98 in (25 mm)
0.98 in (25 mm)
0.55 in (14 mm)
Collapsible tire26
185/60-17 93P
175/55-18 95P
175/50-19 97P
Recommended tire inflation pressure
41 psi (2.8 bar)
51 psi (3.5 bar)
51 psi (3.5 bar)
Z
26 Must
not be used with snow chains.
347
Technical data
Electrical system
Electrical system
Model
SL 550
SL 600
SL 63 AMG
SL 65 AMG
Alternator
14 V / 180 A
14 V / 180 A
14 V / 180 A
14 V / 180 A
Starter motor
12 V / 1.7 kW
12 V / 2.0 kW
12 V / 2.1 kW
12 V / 1.7 kW
Starter battery
12 V / 35 Ah
12 V / 35 Ah
12 V / 35 Ah
12 V / 35 Ah
Battery for electrical consumers
12 V / 70 Ah
12 V / 70 Ah
12 V / 70 Ah
12 V / 70 Ah
Type
NGK PLKR 7A
NGK IFR 6Q-G
NGK ILZKAR 7A10
NGK IFR 6Q-G
Electrode gap
0.031 in (0.8 mm)
0.028 in (0.7 mm)
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
0.028 in (0.7 mm)
Tightening torque
15 lb-ft - 18 lb-ft
(20 Nm - 25 Nm)
18 lb-ft - 22 lb-ft
(25 Nm - 30 Nm)
15 lb-ft - 18 lb-ft
(20 Nm - 25 Nm)
18 lb-ft - 22 lb-ft
(25 Nm - 30 Nm)
Spark plugs
348
Technical data
Main dimensions
Main dimensions
Model
SL 550
SL 600
SL 63 AMG
SL 65 AMG
Overall vehicle length
179.8 in (4 566 mm)
181.0 in (4 598 mm)
Overall vehicle length when opening/closing hardtop
185.6 in (4 713 mm)
187.9 in (4 772 mm)
Overall vehicle width, exterior rear view mirrors folded out
81.5 in (2 069 mm)
81.5 in (2 069 mm)
Overall vehicle height
51.0 in (1 295 mm)
51.1 in (1 298 mm)
Overall vehicle height when opening/closing hardtop
65.9 in (1 674 mm)
66.1 in (1 680 mm)
Wheelbase
100.8 in (2 560 mm)
100.8 in (2 560 mm)
Track, front
61.4 in (1 559 mm)
61.8 in (1 569 mm)
Track, rear
60.5 in (1 537 mm)
61.2 in (1 555 mm)
Turning circle
36.2 ft (11.04 m)
36.3 ft (11.05 m)
Z
349
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Weights
Trunk load
max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Engine with oil filter
Automatic transmission
350
Capacities
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use
products tested and approved by MercedesBenz.
For information on tested and approved products, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with
respect to handling, storing, and disposing
of service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
Keep service fluids out of the reach of children.
For health reasons, you should prevent
service fluids from coming into direct contact with your skin or clothing.
If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
SL 550
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Approved engine oils
SL 600
SL 63 AMG
SL 65 AMG
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
SL 550
9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
SL 63 AMG
9.3 US qt (8.8 l)
SL 600
SL 65 AMG
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Rear axle
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
SL 550
SL 600
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
MB Hypoid Gear Oil (SAE 85W-90)
SL 63 AMG
Fuchs Titan EG 5010 D
SL 63 AMG27
SL 65 AMG
Castrol SAF-XJ (SAE 75W-140)
Hydraulic system for active body All models
control (ABC)
4.0 US qt (3.8 l)
MB ABC Fluid
Power steering
All models
1.1 US qt (1.0 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid
(Chevron Texaco PSF 9109)
Brake system
All models
1.1 US qt (1.05 l)
MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system
SL 550
approx. 12.3 US qt (11.6 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
SL 600
approx. 13.6 US qt (12.9 l)
SL 63 AMG
approx. 11.9 US qt (11.3 l)
SL 65 AMG
approx. 14.8 US qt (14.0 l)
Low temperature cooling system SL 600
SL 65 AMG
approx. 2.2 US qt (2.1 l)
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
approx. 3.4 US qt (3.2 l)
Z
27 SL
63 AMG with Performance Package.
351
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuel tank
All models
21.1 US gal (80.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline
(Minimum Posted Octane 91
[Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON])
Fuel tank reserve
SL 550
SL 600
2.6 US gal (10.0 l)
SL 63 AMG
SL 65 AMG
3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
Air conditioning system
All models
—
R-134a refrigerant and special
PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Hydraulic system for retractable
hardtop
All models
0.42 US qt (0.4 l)
MB Hydraulic Oil
Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system
All models
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate28
Washer fluid mixing ratio
(Y page 357)
28 Use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point.
352
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Approved engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for our
service intervals. Therefore, only use
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with Maintenance System.
Conventional petroleum-based oils must not
be used for vehicles with Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required
for the Maintenance System, or changing
of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer
than those called for by the Maintenance
System will result in engine or emission
control system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so will result in engine or emission
control system damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Use the table below to determine the
MB sheet number.
Model
Engine type MB sheet
number
SL 550
273
229.5
SL 600
275
229.5
SL 63 AMG
156
229.529
SL 65 AMG
275
229.5
Engine oil additives
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the outside of oil containers.
Viscosity grades for engine oils
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
according to the lowest air temperature
expected before the next oil change.
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine. Damage or
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
additives are not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
Z
29 Restriction:
Only SAE XW-40 engine oils may be used.
353
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
system.
! Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
G Warning!
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere.
Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to
the formation of bubbles in the system,
thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance Booklet for replacement interval.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized MercedesBenz Center will provide you with additional
information.
354
Premium unleaded gasoline
G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. It burns violently and can cause serious personal injury.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline!
Turn off the engine before refueling.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
health.
! To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used.
If premium unleaded gasoline is not available and low octane gasoline is used, follow
these precautions:
RHave
the fuel tank only partially filled
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
as possible.
RAvoid
full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
RDo
not exceed an engine speed of
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
light load such as two persons and no
luggage.
not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully
loaded or operating in mountainous terrain.
RDo
Fuel requirements
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline additives
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline.
Mercedes-Benz recommends only the use of
quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.
After an extended period of using fuels without such additives carbon deposits can build
up, especially on the intake valves and in the
combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
RWarm-up
hesitation
RUnstable
idle
RKnocking/pinging
RMisfire
RPower
loss
In areas where carbon deposits may be
encountered due to lack of availability of gasoline which contains these additives, Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
vehicles.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a listing of approved product(s). Follow directions
on product label.
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
This only results in unnecessary cost and may
be harmful to the engine operation.
! Damage or malfunction resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending additional
fuel additives other than those tested and
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz
vehicles are not covered by the MercedesBenz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
or Extended Limited warranties.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
RCorrosion
RFreeze
protection
protection
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection to
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
protection.
! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze separately from each other,
could cause engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
pressurized cooling system is reached at
approximately 266‡ (130†).
The coolant solution must be used year round
to provide the necessary corrosion protection
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
interval.
Coolant system design and coolant used
determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
of equal specification are used to renew the
coolant concentration or bring it back up to
the proper level.
For information on other Mercedes-Benz
approved products of equal specification,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 50% anticorro-
355
Z
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
sion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protection to approximately -35‡ [-37†]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
system checked for signs of leakage). Please
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
label instructions.
356
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
parts. The use of aluminum components in
motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such
engines be specifically formulated to protect
the aluminum parts. Failure to use such anti-
corrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a
significantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or once
a year in hot southern regions), you should
have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked.
The coolant is also regularly checked each
time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Model
Cooling system
Low temperature cooling system
Washer system and headlamp cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Approximate freeze protection
-35‡ (-37†)
-49‡ (-45†)
SL 550
6.1 US qt (5.8 l)
6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
SL 600
6.8 US qt (6.45 l)
7.5 US qt (7.1 l)
SL 63 AMG
6.0 US qt (5.65 l)
6.6 US qt (6.2 l)
SL 65 AMG
7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
8.1 US qt (7.7 l)
SL 600
1.1 US qt (1.05 l)
1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
SL 65 AMG
1.7 US qt (1.6 l)
1.9 US qt (1.8 l)
Washer fluid mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
SummerFit” and water:
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
R1
part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB
SummerFit” and commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze:
R1
part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
Z
357
358
359
360
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine MercedesBenz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work
or repairs. Improper or incomplete service
or the use of incorrect or inappropriate
parts or materials may damage the vehicle
or its equipment, which may in turn result
in personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying
out any type of service, turn to the advice
of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in
design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time February 07, 2008
GSP / TID
Printed in U. S. A.
É2305842896[ËÍ
2305842896
Order no. 6515 3083 13 Part no. 230 584 28 96 Edition A 2009 USA